大学英语新世纪视听说第二册听力原文及答案免费
- 格式:pdf
- 大小:336.36 KB
- 文档页数:35
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship. B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman whosat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is arecord of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for along time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳育创编 2021.02.04 欧阳育创编 2021.02.04Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances. Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box? Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too. The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this clubwrite, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together. Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers. OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles;7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod;8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king asa gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people! What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.欧阳语创编A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳语创编A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classic OL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4.a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My ye arbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home.I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I did n’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. Thiswill make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents andhe saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign;8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a p roject about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch e ach other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maoriare the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers;4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great;4. project;5. AIDS;6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous;6. business card;7. jump and nod;8. for luck;9. start laughing;10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrateand support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal.I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they e at a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B.1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off;6. gets covered with;7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes;9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable no w.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always w ear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear l ong skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer.A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about bec oming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have car ds. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2:A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance. OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. Theyjust talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase;5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story ju st in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax! Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?”I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. Shedied five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern.Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible thata part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so? A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs.I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. has an alibi;7. it isn’t true;8. walks in;9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare. Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3。
新世纪大学英语 2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it. G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a longtime to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future. Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed. In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going? W: I’m going to the library to study. M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek);5. in the eyes;6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People havehealthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were verysurprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States,for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruitsand vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. Butresearchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t dohard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activitieslike gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a goodattitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised.They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in theworld. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises,massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳道创编 2021.03.06Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “Noway!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff! That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly. Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor.I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was sitting around the table, waiting for the meal to be served. But the fridge was empty, and the gas stove didn’t work. And there was no electricity at all for the microwave oven and the the food processor. The hungry kids started to cry. I was in despair. And then suddenly I woke up.Optional Listening 3Sleep and dreamsScientists know that the brain is very active when a person is sleeping. There are five stages, or parts, of sleep. Stage 1 starts after you fall asleep. If there is a noise or a bright light, you wake up very easily. In stage 2, your brain waves are very slow. In stage 3 and 4, you are in deep sleep. It’s very difficult to wake up then. Your body rests and grows during these stages. Stage 5 is when you dream. Your eyes move a lot, and your brain waves are fast. This stage of sleep is very important for your memory. After stage 5, you wake up a little, and then stage 1 starts again. We go through the five stages of sleep four or five times every night, so we have many dreams in one night.How much sleep do you need? The answer depends on your age. Babies should sleep 15 to 16 hours every day. Children and teenagers need 9 or 10 hpurs of sleep, but older people only need 6 to 8 hours. If you sleep for only four hours one night, you may just feel tired the next day. But many nights of bad sleep can be bad for your health. People who don’t get enough sleep get sick more often. And sle ep is very important for learning. It’s one reason why students should go to bed early.Optional Listening 4The meaning of dreamsFor centuries, people have asked: why do we dream? What do our dreams mean? Today, science doesn’t have definite answers to t hese questions, but we do know some things about dreams. First, we all dream, often 4 to 5 times a night. Second, we don’t usually remember most of our dreams. And finally, when we dream, our brains are very active.。
新世纪视听说教程2答案听力原文unit5Directions: In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.A: Do you know that my handbag is missing?B: There's a good chance that you will find it in the bedroom..The woman should look for her handbag in the dining room. (岭师分享群391337364发布)The woman should look for her handbag in the bedroom.Her handbag is probably lost.Her handbag is probably stolen in the shop.A: I had a strange dream last night. I was a prince.B: Well, it's only a dream ...The man's dream is very strange.The man's dream is real.The man shouldn't take the dream too seriously.The man should tell more about his dream.A: John, do you have a minute?B: Yeah. What is it, Carol?A: I'm writing my term paper on my computer. But these windows keep popping up all the time. You see that one? Do you know what's going on?B: Oh, that's a problem. Have you used any software this morning?A: I just received my emails and then I used this writingprogram, as always.B: Then it's really weird. When was the first time you saw these nasty windows?A: This morning ... Oh, I remember ... something was wrong with my computer yesterday.B: What is it?A: Um ... when I finished my work yesterday, the computer couldn't be shut off like before. So I just cut the power. Do you think it is connected?B: Maybe. Eh ... then ... what did you do on your computer yesterday?A: Surfing the net, writing the paper ... Oh, there was something more. I chatted with a friend online.B: All right. Now I see. It's probably a virus problem and you probably get it through the chatting program.A: Really? Then what can I do now?B: Don't worry about that. I'll fix it.A: Oh, thank you. It's so kind of you.Questions 3 to 5 are based on the conversation you have just heard.What problem does Carol have on her computer?She cannot shut off her computer.Windows keep popping up.She cannot write her paper.The computer cannot be turned on.Carol _____ this morning.received emailssurfed the netdownloaded musicchatted onlineJohn thinks the problem is caused by ____.the chatting programthe email programCarol's carelessnessvirusDirections: In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Directions: In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Passage OneThe Bermuda Triangle is an area of water in the North Atlantic Ocean where a large number of planes and boats have gone missing mysteriously. Over the years many explanations have been put forward for the disappearances. Although many of the reports have been exaggerated, there is still no explanation for the large number of disappearances in the area. Scientists now have two best theories for the mystery. One theory is that a giant sea animal lives in the triangle. It takes ships and pulls them down. A scientist once found a 6-foot eel, which is expected to grow 72 feet long. Someone also saw sea monsters. This theory is hard to be proven, but there may just be something in the Bermuda Triangle. The other better theory is the gas theory. Carbon dioxide is a gas that freezes at much warmer temperatures than water. The triangle is full of carbon dioxideand that means that when boats pass through the triangle, the gas can freeze on the base, making the boats sink from the weight. The gas can also explain plane disappearances too. When the engine starts, it can cause the gas in the air to catch fire and make the aircraft explode. The explosion can also explain the strange lights in the triangle. So this theory can explain a lot.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.Where is the Bermuda Triangle?In the North Pacific Ocean.In the South Pacific Ocean.In the North Atlantic Ocean.In the South Atlantic Ocean.A large number of boats and _____ have been reported missing in the area.shipspeoplefishplanesA scientist once found an eel which could grow to _____ long.6 feet12 feet36 feet72 feetCarbon dioxide ________ at much warmer temperature than water.turned into waterexpandsfreezesdisappearsAccording to one explanation, aircrafts explode because _____.the gas in the air catches fire when the engine startssinking boats are explodingthe temperature is too high in the areastrange lights have appeared in the airPassage TwoThe Stonehenge is located in southern England. It is a large circle of stones that was built around 2500-1600 B.C. Its purpose still remains a mystery to scientists. Legend says that the heel stone, a famous stone there, was thrown by the devil into a monk. It struck him on the heel and is still there. People used to believe the giants made the Stonehenge. Now many of them believe that the Stonehenge could have been used for religious purposes. It could be a calendar marking an event in the future, according to its position that matched the stars. The Stonehenge could have been built for a religious God. More recently two major new theories have been proposed. According to one theory, the Stonehenge was used in a ritual and was joined to Durrington Walls and the River Avon. The area around Durrington Walls was a land of the living, while the Stonehenge was a land of the dead.A journey along the Avon to reach Stonehenge represents a journey from life to death, to honor the people who died in the past.The other theory suggested that Stonehenge was a place of healing. And that is why there are so many graves in the area. However supporters of both theories do agree that the place was probably used for ancestor worship.Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.The Stonehenge in England is _____.no longer a mysterya large circle of stonesa riverside areaa circle of old wallsAccording to the legend, the heel stone was thrown by a devil into a ____.farmermonkgiantwomanWhy could the Stonehenge be used as a calendar?Because people marked important dates on it.Because the number of stones matched the number of days.Because it was located in the middle of England.Because its position matched the stars.One recent theory says that Stonehenge represents a journey _____.from poverty to wealthfrom child to adultfrom life to deathfrom sunrise to sunsetWhat do the two recent theories have in common?Both of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship gods.Both of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship ancestors.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was built by British people.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was used by the church.Directions: In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.Sherlock Homes is probably the greatest detective ever known.He never actually existed.He was an imaginary detective who appears in sixty stories.He was very intelligent and successful and solved many cases.He always arrested the criminal.Directions:There is a short text shown on the computer screen (as is shown below). You are required to read the text aloud. Your voice will be recorded into the system. You'll have 1 minute for preparation and then you are required to begin reading when hearing the beginning signal sound and stop it when hearing the ending signal sound. Your reading should be limited within 1.5 minutes. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.Déjà vu [] is a fancy term, taken from French, which means "already seen." It's a feeling you get that you've been somewhere and seen something or done something before. But you know perfectly well that you haven't been there before and haven't seen that or done that before. People get all excited about it, and think maybe they really did that stuff in a previous life or something. I'm a nurse and I've read all about it. What's really going on is some signal activity in the brain. And every now and then one of those signals runs the wrong way. So it's like a false thought. You feel like you were there before but you really weren't. It's just our brains' short-circuiting.Directions: Look at the picture below, which is about a well-known unsolved mystery. You are required to tell 1) what you have read or heard about it; 2) what part of it you believe and why; 3) what part of it you don't believe and why. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.Directions:True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).Looking for Mr. Right Sun-hee: Tara, are you still reading the personal ads?Tara: Yep.Sun-hee: You know those ads will never help you find a relationship.Tara: Yes, they will! I've already been on three dates.Sun-hee: Yeah. And you're still looking ...Tara: Well, it's just that I haven't found the right person yet.Sun-hee: I don't get it . You've been on three unsuccessful dates, and you still think it's a good idea. Why?Tara: Well, for one thing, I wouldn't say all my dates have been completely unsuccessful. I may not have met "Mr. Right" yet, but I've still had fun.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have fun anywhere. You don't need to go searching through a newspaper for "Mr. Right".Tara: Sun-hee, it can happen! My friend Karen just got engaged to a man she met through the personals, and she dated lots of men before she met him.Sun-hee: And that means ... Sun-hee: He's probably a total Romeo ... "Romantic" ... "casual dating" ... there's no way he's sincere.Sun-hee: Hmm ... "good personality" ... "looks aren't everything" ... sounds like he might not be too cute.Tara: Why do you say that? You've never even met him.Tara: You are so fussy! No wonder you haven't tried dating through the personals yet.Sun-hee: If you must know, I did answer a personal ad ... once.Tara: Yeah? What happenedSun-hee: We went out for dinner, and all he did was talk about himself — and his old girlfriend! Oh, it was awful!Tara: OK, that does sound terrible, but they're not all bad.Tara: All right. Let's goTara is reading a magazine.TFTara already has three unsuccessful dates.TFTara's friend Karen married a man she met through the personal ads.TFSun-hee has never tried dating through personal ads.TFIn the end Tara and Sun-hee will go out to answer a personal ad.TFDirections: Fill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have fun anywhere. You don't need to go searching through newspaper for "Mr. Right". ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never give up ! Ooh! Here's one: "Romantic, handsome , well-built male looking for attractive female for casual dating ." ... Tara: Why do you say that? You've never even met him. Sun-hee: Well, first of all , he's writing about his "good personality " and "intelligence". And second of all, he'ssaying that looks shouldn't be important for the person he dates.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have anywhere. You don't need to go newspaper for "Mr. Right". ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never! Ooh! Here's one: "Romantic,, well-built maleattractive female for." ... Tara: Why do you say that? You've neverhim. Sun-hee: Well, first, he'swriting about his "good" and "intelligence". And second of all, he's saying that shouldn't be important for the person he dates.Directions: In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer. (岭师分享群391337364发布)(注:文档可能无法思考全面,请浏览后下载,供参考。
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something thatgives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s person al! I wrote about myfirst boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my hig h school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’snot hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). Th ere are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry. Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mo therM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to stud y.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this? M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t po int at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Th at means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpr ised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.欧阳生创编 2021.02.08 B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳生创编 2021.02.08Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye m y hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be c omfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my ha ir red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Ex pert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. Th e “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said,“No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popu lar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good w eekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s startin g to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and wal ked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sm all town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. D ifferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came fro m Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t tru e;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It r an toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
新世纪大学英语 2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wroteabout my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories. B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone.I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on theairplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---makingbeautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries.It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until youfind a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usuallyin the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first.Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricularactivities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. Thereis even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( afunny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the“ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. Thisis especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other,such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lotsof fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of theyear.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6.titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had nofriends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed. People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod;8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people! What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such asweightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4.Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳文创编Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know whatto expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classic OL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions. C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4.a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during ane xperiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly; OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house.I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.。
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box? Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a fewold keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is ! B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories. B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around inthere! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l!I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, Itraveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put thisbox away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’snot hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,”“ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better thanten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to usewith your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout thatyou like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make yourscrapbook much more interesting andvaluable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the“ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), andthe “ best dressed” (a student with agood fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, andthen decorate them with felt pens, paintand stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5.yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she wasin college; 8. had no friends; 9. remindher to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot her M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening. P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community. Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty. Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other i n public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. Whenyou give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS;6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it! Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are richin vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indianscientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier.The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---themost in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave themto their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange andgrows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People havehealthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, theOkinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birthrecords from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records.They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living inOkinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people.In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many freshfruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea.But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. Theydon’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they preferrelaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that olderOkinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax theirminds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3.farmers; 4. Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat andmakes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chilepepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water,green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathingexercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets coveredwith; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test. Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!欧阳音创编 2021.03.11 欧阳音创编2021.03.11G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳音创编 2021.03.11 欧阳音创编2021.03.11Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you lik e?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would causea huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most, which made life much easier. There was also a dining table in the middle of the room. The whole family was。
2的optional listening 原文及答案免 费下载Unit On e, Book 22-1-3 ---- 2-1-4 __Liste ning 1Gran dma: Oh, no thi ng really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Oh, ok ….Well then, what 's that? It has your picture in it.Boy: Hey, Gran dma, what's in this box?B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is ! B: No, I don ' t. I really don't.'s something you keep. It alot of memories. G: Well, it ' s something that gives youB: Oh. What's this?G: Now donsee ….that 't go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let ' s my first diary.B: Can IG: No, you canboyfrie nd in there. He became your gran dfather!'t read it! It' s pers on al! I wrote about myfirst新世纪大学英语视听说教程G: That ' s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe byship.B: What ' s that big book?G: My year book. It ' s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that ' s old!G: That ' s about eno ugh out of you, young man. I think ittime we put this box away and …Liste ning 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visitmy gran dpare nts in Los An geles. I felt very n ervous abouttraveling so far, but my mother said, “ Don ' t worry. You fine. ” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in LosAngeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, Ididn ' t want to go home!Liste ning 3Maki ng memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautifulbooks to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can in cludephotos, draw in gs, jour nal en tries. It scrapbook that yous not hard to make awill enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples:“ School days, ”“ Family travel, ”“ Memories of my grandparents, ” “ Baby ' s first year. ”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better tha n ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old n ewspaper clipp in gs, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Desig n the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use yourimagi nati on!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step!Remember to write down the “ 5 Ws ” of your photos: Who,What, Where, Whe n, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Liste ning 4Yearbooks in the Un ited StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year—— a “ book of memories ” for thestude nts.In side a yearbook is each stude nt ' s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or sec on d-year stude nts. The last photos are the first-year stude nts, the freshme n. The yearbook is not on ly about stude nts. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptio ns of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is eve n a yearbook club. Stude nts in this club write, desig n, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is pr in ted.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniorsvote and choose the “ class clown ”( a funny student), the“ most likely to succeed ”( a stude nt every one thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed ” (a student with a goodfashi on sen se). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other ' s yearbooks. This isespecially importa nt for the seniors, because they are graduati ng.Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot offun, ” o“ I ' II never forget you. ” They also write about all thefun and funny experie nces they shared in school together.Keys:0L1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfrie nd 2.Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for along time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with hisgrandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn ' t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbook ing is maki ng beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be in cluded in scrapbooks. 2.Old n ewspaper clipp in gs, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “ 5 Ws ” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “ School days ” , “ Family travel ” , “ Memories of my grandparents ”,“ Baby ' s first year5. Usd'imagination todesig n the pages, and the n decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they aregraduati ng soon. 3.Y es; 4. At the end of the year. 5」t mea ns astude nt with a good fashi on sen se.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sig n; 8. memories0L51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6.pendant; 7. she was in college; 8. had no frien ds; 9. rem ind her tobe stron g; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie ' s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I ' ll help you.W: I don ' t see Connie any where.M: Look! She ' s over there. Standig at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn ' t see us.W: You ' re right, It ' s too no isy, and she ' s talk ing to some one. 2M: Well, here we are. This is my momW: It ' s beautiful.M: Hey, Je n. Are you okay?W: I ' m just a little n ervous. ItmotherM: Come on. Don ' t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I ' d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It ' s very nice to meet you. W: It ' s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I ' m going to the library to study.M: For what? It ' s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They ' re n ext week. M: Wow, well, good luck!s house.s my first time meeting yourW: Tha nks!4.W: Bill, it ' s late. Where ' s the theater? M: Hmmm … I think it ' s near here. W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm …I don ' t know.W: Where ' s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I ' m worki ng in an ofice. And I ' m study ing computerscie nee in the eve ning.P: You ' re rely busy!J: That ' s for sure! And in my free time, I ' m learning Spanish f my vacatio n. I ' m pla nning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They ' re doing great! Alex is help ing our father in his bus in ess,and Adam is going to Pacific Un iversity.P: How n ice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I ' m doing great, too. I ' m worki ng on a project aboutcom mun ity safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We ' re pla nning a campaig n aga inst theft, fire ,AIDSand drugs in our com muni ty.J: Oh, that sounds in teresti ng!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the com muni ty.Opti onal Liste ning 3Know before you go!In Ban gladesh people greet their friends by shaki ng hands softlyand the n putt ing their hands over their heart. People inBangladesh don ' t use many gestures. Waving at people andwinking are very rude. Don ' t touch people on the head. Donpoint with your foot---Ban gladeshi people thi nk feet are very dirty.Indon esia ns greet people with a long han dshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeti ng, give every pers on your bus in ess card, but use your right hand——using your left hand is very rude in Indon esia.In Thaila nd, the traditi onal greet ing is called wai----people puttheir hand s together and bow. Men and women don ' t oftentouch each other in public. Thai people don ' t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laughwhe n they feel n ervous or embarrassed.People in the Un ited Arab Emirates have some special gestures.Whe n two men meet, they shake han ds. Sometimes old men touch no ses together. Wome n kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn ' t shake hands with her. He justsmiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don ' tt point a use your left hand. And donpeopole with your fin ger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Opti onal Liste ning4World greeti ngsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. Whe n wome n meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Wome n also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake han ds, look at the pers on in the eyes. This shows in terest and frie ndli ness.In New Zeala nd, usually, both men and wome n shake hands whe n they meet some one for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people press ing their no ses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditi onal greet ing.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In bus in ess, people also shake han ds. In formal situati ons, people ofte n excha nge bus in ess cards. When you give a bus in ess card, give it with both han ds. This is polite. Special no te: In Japa n, a smile can have differe nt meanin gs. It usually means that the pers on is happy. or that the pers on thinks someth ing is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed. Keys:0L1: A. 1. wav ing to; 2. shak ing han ds; 3. cross ing his fin gers; 4.shrugg ingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That ' s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They ' re doing cproject; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake han ds; 2. Japa n, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(eachother on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japa n, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditi on al; 2.greet in gs; 3.1 ear ning; 4.trip; 5. n ervous; 6.bus in ess card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughi ng; 10.relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Opti on al liste ning 1Today our lives are busier tha n they were 10 or 20 years ago. Forsome people, this is a problem. They thi nk we should slow dow nand enjoy life. The Slow Food moveme nt was started to celebrateand support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its membersdon ' t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are un healthy.The Slow Food moveme nt started in Europe, but now it is anintern ati onal moveme nt. There are more tha n 65,000 membersin 45 countries. The Slow Food movement ' s members think we n eed to slow dow n and appreciate delicious traditi onal foods.They also believe in protect ing the en vir onmen t. In additi on, theybelieve in support ing local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I ' m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet.There ' s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Every one says that I sho uld eat less butter. It ' s hard.Jan et: I lived in Thaila nd for six mon ths. It was really fun. I reallylike Thai food! It ' s too spicy for some people, but not for me. Ilove the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food heretastes so bland--- I don ' t lik it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “ sweet tooth. ” That meanI like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. Ilike anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I ' m training for a swimming competition. I have to eathealthy foods all the time. At first I didn ' t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Opti onal Liste ning 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world.Farmers grew the first chile peppers more tha n 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the pla nt spread through South America and the Caribbea n. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaic in. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee“ hot. ”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and In dia n scie ntists discovered that eat ing chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec In dia ns of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the haba nero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every con ti nent except An tarctica.Optional Listening 4In many coun tries of the world, people are liv ing Ion ger tha n before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okin awa is an isla nd off the coast of Japa n. The people on Okin awa, the Okin awa ns, may have the Ion gest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by look ing at city and tow n birtht exp records from 1879. They did n ect tofind many centen aria ns in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The Un ited States, for example, has 10 centen aria ns per 100,1000 people. In Okin awa there are 34 centen aria ns per 100,100 people!What is the Okin awa ns ' secret? First, they eat a healthy diet.They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okin awa ns have other healthy habits as well. They don ' t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging --in stead, they prefer relax ing activities like garde ning and walk ing. Researchers say that older Okin awa ns also have a good attitude about agi ng. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathi ng exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:0L1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B.1. fast; 2」ife; 3. farmers; 4. Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breath ing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. con test; 2. tomatoes; 3. add ing; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with;7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 11.In terviewer (In t): Hi, what ' s your n ame?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Mila n, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I ' m always borrow ing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I ' m not very inno vative. I just wear the samething all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Ele na: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I ' m Ele na.I: And where are you from?E: I ' m from right here in New Y ork.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from …?E: A store in my n eighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It s fashi on able now.I: It looks old-fash ion able now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good eve ning. What is your n ame?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Won derful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I ' mcfm Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your pers onal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Opti onal Liste ning 21A: I ' m new in town and I ' d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don ' t like sports.B: You could look for frie nds on the In ternet.2A: I don ' t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear? B: You could wear your new jea ns or your black pan ts.A: It ' s a formal dress party.to wear a dress.t un dersta nd this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. ItThursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give meextra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. ThereA: I still don s not much time!Opti onal Liste ning 3A--A sense of style1.1 ' m a salesclerk in a woman ' s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wearlong skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on .It ' s really bori ng, so I ' m pla nning to dye my hair red. What do youthi nk?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about myclothes. She does n ' t want to go any where with me because Ialways wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don ' t care aboutlooki ng like a fashi on magaz in e. I just want to be comfortable!What ' s your advice?B1. I ' m a salesclerk in a woman ' s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wearlong skirts, black shoes, no j ewelry, and on and on .It ' s really bori ng, so I ' m pla nning to dye my hair red. What do youthi nk?Expert s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer.A bus in ess wants to have a particular look, so they tell youwhat to wear. If you want to show off your in dividual style, youhad better do it in your free time.2.1 love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about myclothes. She does n ' t want to go any where with me because Ialways wear old jeans and a T- shirt. I don ' t care aboutlooki ng like a fashi on magaz in e. I just want to be comfortable!What ' s your advice?Expert ' s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk withyour girlfrie nd and expla in how you feel. We all have our ownstyle and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much aboutappeara nces.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a tren dspotter. I wasnervous and didn ' t know what to expect. Well, guess what? Itwas a lot of fun! I ' m telling all my friends, “ You shouldabout beco ming a tren dspotter, too ”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studioby 10 am The “ Trends Coordinator, ” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave eachperson three cards. One ca rd said “ Yes —All the way! ”Ano ther said, “It ' s OK. ” The third one said, “ No way! liste ned to about 10 differe nt son gs. After each song we hadto hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavymetal; and dance music. The heavy metal was for No way ”me.Do you know the rock group called “ Gifted ” ? They ' re reall popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six differe nt CD covers. (I guess they are trying to chooseon e.) This time, we did n ' t have cards. In stead, we just talkedabo ut the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions,“ Wones do you like? ”“ Why do you like them? ”“ Would you buy a CD with this cover? ”We fini shed at 12:30. We will meet aga in n ext week at aboutique dow ntow n. We will look at some new fashi ons. Eachweek we go to a differe nt locati on. Oh yes, we also received ab B. 1. You could look for friends on the in ternet.'t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taki ng the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time. have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appeara nee. free CD for our tour. Thisjob doesn ' t pay, but we get a free stuff!That ' s all for now!KeysOL1: A Ele na: New Y orkVicki: Ho ng Kong B. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in n eighborhood /retro, old-fashi onedVicki: mother, classic OL2 : A. f c 2. You should n0L4 B. 1. She was n ervous and did n had to report tot what t(2.dShea record ing studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had todec ide which song was “ OK” , and which one was “ Noway ”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5.They are going to look at some new fashi ons.C. 1. doesn ' t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way ” card, Notan “It ' s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogg ing; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. in crease; 5.gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9.of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Opti onal Liste ning 1Mike: …Soe can look forward to warmer temperature. It ' ll be a good weeke nd for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And fin ally,this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, NickBrow n, saw some stra nge lights. He was dri ving home at about10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved acrossthe sky. He stopped at a gas stati on and talked to a policeofficer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that ' s strange storyVhat happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no filmin his camera. Fin ally, he called his wife on his cell pho ne. Butby that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a lege nd around here aboutmysterious ligh ts … a lot of local people have seen the lights.It ' s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What doyou think, Alexa?A: I don ' t believe it. I think it ' s some kind of hoax! Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn ' t dev^lelowlylSudde nly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed n eatly andsta nding in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow,I stopped the car quickly. “ What are you doing? ” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn ' t answer. “ Are you OK?” I asked. “I ' m fine, ” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to myhotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl.you know her? ” I asked. “ Oh yes, ” he said calmly.“ ThMary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a caraccide nt duri ng a rain storm. ”Opti onal Liste ning 3A. The Tun guska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in easter n Russia.Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska.People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were dow n. People heard the explosi on 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosi on? A cen tury later,scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible expla nati ons.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock thatgoes around in space and sometimes hit the pla net. They cancause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosi on.2. A comet: Comets are gia nt balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern.Encke ' s Comet was near Earth in 1908, and ita part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceshipcrashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wan ted to destroy the earth,so they aimed their weap ons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists madea mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man namedNikola Tesla tried to build a “ supergunMaybe it was a test of his gun and it didnOptional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States.It ' s famous for the “ Marfa mystery lightsQ. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many differe nt ideas about that. s possible thatthat used electricity. 't work correctly.Q. Can you describe them?A. That ' s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sun set in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vani sh. Then they sudde nly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don ' t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellis on and the year was 1883. Of course we didn ' t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native America ns thought the lights were stars falli ng to Earth. Some people th ink ura nium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball light ning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rain storm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ ghost lights ” . They think ghosts do it. That ' s the strangest idea. Some say they areUFOs. I don ' t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can ' t figure it out. Some engineers even came fromJapan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn ' t solv the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren ' t. They like the lights. And everyyear in early September there is a big tow n festival to celebrate the mystery lights. KeysOL1: A.从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brow n, police officer,local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2.Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said walked away quietly.I ' m fine.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accide nt five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; n eatly; quickly; stra ngely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosi on; 2. In easter n Russia n; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1,3 (sec ond row) 5, 2。
Nora Nelson: She lives in 2AWes and Lydia: They live in 3BTwo boys: They’re classmatesMrs. Hanson: She’s related to Nora. She lives in 3C’s affairsA nosy person might be too interested in things that do not concern them, especially other peopleActivity 22-- passport 1-- diary 3---yearbook2. boyfriend3. it’s personal4. Europe, ship5. sixtiesActivity 31. 132. To visit his grandparents.3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman.4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he didn’t even want to go home.very nervous about traveling so far His grandparents their home twoActivity 4theme other paper keepsakes your photos and keepsakes1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories.2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.parents”, “and “Baby’s first year.”3. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grand4. You can use felt pens, paints, and stickers.5. The “5Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when, and why.Activity 51. Most high schools in the U.S.2. Because they are graduating soon.3. Yes.4. At the end of the year.5. It means a student with a good fashion sense.Once a year spring chess most likely to succeed categories notes I’ll never forget yourecord photo seniors sports yearbook titles sign memoriesFrom left to right: 1 3 2Bored sad happyActivity 21. waving to2. shaking hands3. crossing his fingers4. shrugging1.wallet2. nervous3. studying for a test4. the theaterActivity 3They are both doing great.1. That’s for sure2. planning a trip to3. What about your brothers4. They’re doing great5. working ona project 6. planning a campaign againstActivity 41. People shake hands.: Bangladesh Indonesia The United Arab Emirates2. People bow. : Indonesia, Thailand3. People give business cards. : Indonesia4. There are rules about touching. : Bangladesh, Thailand5. Don’t wave at people here. : Bangladesh6. There aren’t many hand gestures.: Bangladesh Thailand7. People don’t wink.: Bangladesh,8. Don’t use your left hand here. : Indonesia The United Arab Emirates9. Don’t point at people with your finger. : The United Arab EmiratesActivity 51. shake hands2. Japan, bow3. Maori4. Brazil, kiss ( each other on the cheek)5. in the eyes6. Japan, embarrassedIn Japan, when meeting for the first time in formal situations, people often exchange business cards. The polite way to give or receive a business card is to hold it with two hands.Mississippi mud pie1. Delicious, crispy2. bland3. oily, good4. tasty, too sweetActivity 2We should support and celebrate local food traditions.1.fast2. life3. farmers4. Europe5. membersActivity 3Adam: buttery Janet: spicy Abby: sweet Minh: healthy1.He wanted to lose weight because he was 20 pounds overweight.2.Because she has spent six months in Thailand and comes to like spicy Thai food.3.It means that Abby likes to eat sweet foods.4.Because Minh is training for a swimming competition and he has to eat healthy foods. And now he prefershealthy foods to sweet or buttery foods.Activity 41. T2.F3.T4.F5.F6.T7.T8. FCapsaicin: a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero: the hottest chile pepper in the world. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.Activity 5What they eat: fresh fruits, vegetables, fish;What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking;How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage1. 34 centenarians per 100,000 Okinawans.2. The Okinawans’secret: first, they eat a healthy diet. Second, they don’t do hard exercise. Third, the older Okinawans have a good attitude about aging.Dan: takes care of the baby Courtney: goes to work every dayJamal and Tia: both take care of the girls and work at home1. True2. True3. True4. FalseActivity 2Hometown: Milan New York Hong KongClothes from: brother a store in the neighborhood motherPersonal style: casual retro, old fashioned classicActivity 31----f 2----c 3----b1.You could look for friends on the Internet.2.You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3.You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. Activity 41. b2. a1.Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time2.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearances.Activity 5A trendspotter finds things that are new and popular. Companies might hire trendspottersto help them make new products.1.She was nervous and didn’t know what to do.2.She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.3.They had to decide which song were “Yes---All the way!”, “It’s Ok”, or “No way!”.4.They just talked about the covers they liked.5.They are going to look at some new fashions.1.doesn’t pay, NOT has a good salary2.week, NOT month3.six CD covers, NOT only one CD cover4. a “No way” card, NOT an “It’s OK” cardThe most famous detectives ever known imaginary detective sixty Scottish author moneyDoctor 1887 intelligent Dr. Waston EnglandActivity 24 1 35 2Nick Brown,police officer, local peopleMike thinks the lights could be the same as those in a local legend.Alexa thinks the lights are a hoax.Activity 31. A young girl standing in the middle of the road.2. Because it was raining heavily.3. He stopped the car quickly.4. She said ”I `m fine.”and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.1. heavily2. clearly3. slowly4. neatly5. quickly6. strangely7. happily8. quietly9. Nervously 10. calmlyActivity 41. A terrible explosion2. In eastern Russia.3. June 30, 1908.(first row) 4, 1, 3; (second row) 5, 21. lots of damage huge explosion2. near Earth a part of it broke off3. crashed into the ground its engine exploded4. destroy the earth set fire to the forest5. used electricity a test of his gunActivity 52. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. c1.Different people see different lights.2.Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3.The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to earth.4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.1.Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of a circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.2.some people call the lights “ghost lights”.3.No, they aren’t. actually, they hold a town festival every September to celebrate the mystery lights.Rememberthe last picture1.Two tips. One is to label things in English. The other is to make a note of related words.2.You can rent a film and see it at home.Activity 2(from left to right)2, 3, 11.no one2. couldn’t run3. can’t swimActivity 31. pink2. pillars3. living room, kitchen4. large5. stereo system6. wasn’t1. True2. False; didn’t speak or smile3. False; all4. False; sitting5. True1. The storyteller heard a voice saying, “welcome home.” And he realized the dream house was his.2. He thought his dream was turning into a nightmare because his friends suddenly disappeared and it was scary.3. He liked the food processor most because it makes life much easier.4. He saw the stove was broken and that there was no electricity. He also saw the children were crying because they were hungry. He felt bad and wanted to help prepare a meal but began to despair when he found the refrigerator was empty.Activity 41. Stage 22. Stage 53. Stage 14. Stage 3 and 41.Four or five times.2. In stages 3 and 4.3. Fifteen to sixteen hours a day.4. Sleep is very important for learning.Activity 51. many times2. don’t remember3. very active4. gods5. Greeks and Romans1. True2. False3. False1. definite answers2. Why do we dream3. a person’s mind4. husband or wife5. start a business6. thoughts and feelings7. strange or confusing8. think about the events in the dream 9. feel free or want freedom 10. feel afraidbb a c1. another company2. a bachelor party and a big family reunion3. He’s excited about it and he likes the job.Activity 22, 4, 1, 3It was a lot of fun to rent loud and beautiful The only bad part for himfrom too much dancing some beautiful floats go down the river2,4,3,1traveling through India best memories water pistol shot/sprayed everyonea mess come out ofActivity 31.c2.a1. M2. D3. M4. M5. D1. gets very crowded2. after you arrive3. The most important event4. be sure to fins a good place to sit5. just relax and have fun6. before7. after the parade finishesActivity 41. F Before Mardi Gras even begins, there are over 70 parades of dazzling floats.2. F Start making reservations in August. Don’t wait until January.3. T Many streets are closed to cars, and bus and streetcar schedules often changed.4. T Get there early, about 4 hours ahead of big parades. F or the Sunday night parade, find a space in the morning.5. F You might need a jacket, sunglasses, an umbrella, or all three.6. T People ride on floats in the parades and give “throws” to the crowd.Activity 5b. People use a groundhog to predict the weather.1. T2. F; Not 1995, but 19933. T4. F; Not doesn’t usually see, but usually sees1. A groundhog is a small animal covered with brown fur. It lives in a hole in the ground and stays undergroundduring the winter.2.Every February 2, local people and sightseers in the town of Punxsutawney watch for Pete, a groundhog, tocome out of its hole. If it comes out, Groundhog Day is celebrated with a barbecue, a colorful festival in the park, a souvenir show and sale and even a storytelling festival.3.People think it means the weather will continue to be cold for at least six weeks.4.The weather in February in Punxsutawney is generally cold and will continue to be cold for another six to eightweeks.5.People would be disappointed if Pete didn’t appear.UNIT 8Activity 1F T FCaller: 1,2,3,5 service: 3,4,5Activity 21, 2, 5, 7, 82, 3She wanted to be sure it is safe for her and her young child to cross the road.She also wanted to know if there were any parks she could take her son to.Activity 31. Immediate Release2. picking up dry cleaning3. taking your children to practice4. done for you1.all2.all EXCEPT library books3.all EXCEPT clean and brush your pet1.The services are affordable and convenient.2.They can call (010)55556666.Activity 41. Neither2.Both3.Bogota’4.Both5.Both6.Curitiba7.Neither8.Bogota’1.Because Curitiba was one of Brazil’s fastest growing cities and there were serious pollution problems.2.This plan has been very successful. Curitiba’s population has grown by more than one hundred percent since1974, but traffic has decreased b y thirty percent. Curitiba has reduced air pollution and provided cleaner neighborhood for its citizens.bicycling and walking only Car Free Day without a car 125 closed to carsup to two million enjoy the clean air and quietActivity 5Inwood: eagles, an old forest, an old farmhouseFes-al-Bali: narrow streets, mosques, donkeys1. Inwood2.Fes-al-Bali3.Inwood4. Fes-al-Bal5.Inwood1.Inwood is a different in that it has lots of greenery. It has an old-growth forest, a farmhouse and you can gohiking.2.It’s more than 200 years old and it is no longer a farmhouse. It is now a museum.get lost a wall with gates drive across too narrow for cars walk pedestrians an donkeysReview: Units 1-4CDCCB BADABBAC ABA BDCDBCA ABD CDADtake care of sick telephone office effort spend someone elsehad gone out of town on some sudden unexpected businessI had missed seeing himEnjoyed my sightseeingReview: Units 5-8DDADA BCCBCBA BACBD CADBDC DACB DACcolor fashionable university worn to care for comfortable convenient Although T-shirts are now available in a wide varietymay bear a single wordnew designs are coming up all the time。
Unit 1Activity 1Nora Nelson: She lives in 2AWes and Lydia: They live in 3BTwo boys: They’re classmatesMrs. Hanson: She’s related to Nora. She lives in 3CA nosy person might be too interested in things that do not concern them, especially other people’s affairs Activity 22-- passport 1-- diary 3---yearbook2. boyfriend3. it’s personal4. Europe, ship5. sixtiesActivity 31. 132. To visit his grandparents.3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman.4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he didn’t even want to go home.very nervous a bout traveling so far His grandparents their home twoActivity 4theme other paper keepsakes your photos and keepsakes1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories.2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. “S chool days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grand parent s”, “and “Baby’s first year.”4. You can use felt pens, paints, and stickers.5. The “5Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when, and why.Activity 51. Most high schools in the U.S.2. Because they are graduating soon.3. Yes.4. At the end of the year.5. It means a student with a good fashion sense.Once a year spring chess most likely to succeed categories notes I’ll never forget yourecord photo seniors sports yearbook titles sign memoriesFrom left to right: 1 3 2Bored sad happyActivity 21. waving to2. shaking hands3. crossing his fingers4. shrugging1.wallet2. nervous3. studying for a test4. the theaterActivity 3They are both doing great.1. That’s for sure2. planning a trip to3. What about your brothers4. They’re doing great5. working ona project 6. planning a campaign againstActivity 41. People shake hands.: Bangladesh Indonesia The United Arab Emirates2. People bow. : Indonesia, Thailand3. People give business cards. : Indonesia4. There are rules about touching. : Bangladesh, Thailand5. Don’t wave at people here. : Bangladesh6. There aren’t many hand gestures.: Bangladesh Thailand7. People don’t wink.: Bangladesh,8. Don’t use your left hand here. : Indonesia The United Arab Emirates9. Don’t point at people with your finger. : The United Arab EmiratesActivity 51. shake hands2. Japan, bow3. Maori4. Brazil, kiss ( each other on the cheek)5. in the eyes6. Japan, embarrassedIn Japan, when meeting for the first time in formal situations, people often exchange business cards. The polite way to give or receive a business card is to hold it with two hands.Mississippi mud pie1. Delicious, crispy2. bland3. oily, good4. tasty, too sweetActivity 2We should support and celebrate local food traditions.1.fast2. life3. farmers4. Europe5. membersActivity 3Adam: buttery Janet: spicy Abby: sweet Minh: healthy1.He wanted to lose weight because he was 20 pounds overweight.2.Because she has spent six months in Thailand and comes to like spicy Thai food.3.It means that Abby likes to eat sweet foods.4.Because Minh is training for a swimming competition and he has to eat healthy foods. And now he prefershealthy foods to sweet or buttery foods.Activity 41. T2.F3.T4.F5.F6.T7.T8. FCapsaicin: a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero: the hottest chile pepper in the world. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.Activity 5What they eat: fresh fruits, vegetables, fish;What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking;How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage1. 34 centenarians per 100,000 Okinawans.2. The Okinawans’secret: first, they eat a healthy diet. Second, they don’t do hard exercise. Third, the older Okinawans have a good attitude about aging.Dan: takes care of the baby Courtney: goes to work every dayJamal and Tia: both take care of the girls and work at home1. True2. True3. True4. FalseActivity 2Hometown: Milan New York Hong KongClothes from: brother a store in the neighborhood mother Personal style: casual retro, old fashioned classic Activity 31----f 2----c 3----b1.You could look for friends on the Internet.2.You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3.You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. Activity 41. b2. a1.Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time2.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearances.Activity 5A trendspotter finds things that are new and popular. Companies might hire trendspottersto help them make new products.1.She was nervous and didn’t know what to do.2.She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.3.They had to decide which song were “Yes---All the way!”, “It’s Ok”, or “No way!”.4.They just talked about the covers they liked.5.They are going to look at some new fashions.1.doesn’t pay, NOT has a good salary2.week, NOT month3.six CD covers, NOT only one CD cover4. a “No way” card, NOT an “It’s OK” cardThe most famous detectives ever known imaginary detective sixty Scottish author moneyDoctor 1887 intelligent Dr. Waston EnglandActivity 24 1 35 2Nick Brown,police officer, local peopleMike thinks the lights could be the same as those in a local legend.Alexa thinks the lights are a hoax.Activity 31. A young girl standing in the middle of the road.2. Because it was raining heavily.3. He stopped the car quickly.4. She said ”I `m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.1. heavily2. clearly3. slowly4. neatly5. quickly6. strangely7. happily8. quietly9. Nervously 10. calmlyActivity 41. A terrible explosion2. In eastern Russia.3. June 30, 1908.(first row) 4, 1, 3; (second row) 5, 21. lots of damage huge explosion2. near Earth a part of it broke off3. crashed into the ground its engine exploded4. destroy the earth set fire to the forest5. used electricity a test of his gunActivity 52. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. c1.Different people see different lights.2.Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3.The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to earth.4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.1.Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of a circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.2.some people call the lights “ghost lights”.3.No, they aren’t. actually, they hold a town festival every September to celebrate the mystery lights.Rememberthe last picture1.Two tips. One is to label things in English. The other is to make a note of related words.2.You can rent a film and see it at home.Activity 2(from left to right)2, 3, 11.no one2. couldn’t run3. can’t swimActivity 31. pink2. pillars3. living room, kitchen4. large5. stereo system6. wasn’t1. True2. False; didn’t speak or smile3. False; all4. False; sitting5. True1. The storyteller heard a voice saying, “welcome home.” And he realized the dream house was his.2. He thought his dream was turning into a nightmare because his friends suddenly disappeared and it was scary.3. He liked the food processor most because it makes life much easier.4. He saw the stove was broken and that there was no electricity. He also saw the children were crying because they were hungry. He felt bad and wanted to help prepare a meal but began to despair when he found the refrigerator was empty.Activity 41. Stage 22. Stage 53. Stage 14. Stage 3 and 41.Four or five times.2. In stages 3 and 4.3. Fifteen to sixteen hours a day.4. Sleep is very important for learning.Activity 51. many times2. don’t remember3. very active4. gods5. Greeks and Romans1. True2. False3. False1. definite answers2. Why do we dream3. a person’s mind4. husband or wife5. start a business6. thoughts and feelings7. strange or confusing8. think about the events in the dream 9. feel free or want freedom 10. feel afraidUnit 7Activity 1bb a c1. another company2. a bachelor party and a big family reunion3. He’s excited about it and he likes the job.Activity 22, 4, 1, 3It was a lot of fun to rent loud and beautiful The only bad part for himfrom too much dancing some beautiful floats go down the river2,4,3,1traveling through India best memories water pistol shot/sprayed everyonea mess come out ofActivity 31.c2.a1. M2. D3. M4. M5. D1. gets very crowded2. after you arrive3. The most important event4. be sure to fins a good place to sit5. just relax and have fun6. before7. after the parade finishesActivity 41. F Before Mardi Gras even begins, there are over 70 parades of dazzling floats.2. F Start making reservations in August. Don’t wait until January.3. T Many streets are closed to cars, and bus and streetcar schedules often changed.4. T Get there early, about 4 hours ahead of big parades. For the Sunday night parade, find a space in the morning.5. F You might need a jacket, sunglasses, an umbrella, or all three.6. T People ride on floats in the parades and give “throws” to the crowd.Activity 5b. People use a groundhog to predict the weather.1. T2. F; Not 1995, but 19933. T4. F; Not doesn’t usually see, but usually sees1. A groundhog is a small animal covered with brown fur. It lives in a hole in the ground and stays undergroundduring the winter.2.Every February 2, local people and sightseers in the town of Punxsutawney watch for Pete, a groundhog, tocome out of its hole. If it comes out, Groundhog Day is celebrated with a barbecue, a colorful festival in the park, a souvenir show and sale and even a storytelling festival.3.People think it means the weather will continue to be cold for at least six weeks.4.The weather in February in Punxsutawney is generally cold and will continue to be cold for another six to eightweeks.5.People would be disappointed if Pete didn’t appear.UNIT 8Activity 1F T FCaller: 1,2,3,5 service: 3,4,5Activity 21, 2, 5, 7, 82, 3She wanted to be sure it is safe for her and her young child to cross the road.She also wanted to know if there were any parks she could take her son to.Activity 31. Immediate Release2. picking up dry cleaning3. taking your children to practice4. done for you1.all2.all EXCEPT library books3.all EXCEPT clean and brush your pet1.The services are affordable and convenient.2.They can call (010)55556666.Activity 41. Neither2.Both3.Bogota’4.Both5.Both6.Curitiba7.Neither8.Bogota’1.Because Curitiba was one of Brazil’s fastest growing cities and there were serious pollution problems.2.This plan has been very successful. Curitiba’s population has grown by more than one hundred percent since1974, but traffic has decreased by thirty percent. Curitiba has reduced air pollution and provided cleaner neighborhood for its citizens.bicycling and walking only Car Free Day without a car 125 closed to carsup to two million enjoy the clean air and quietActivity 5Inwood: eagles, an old forest, an old farmhouseFes-al-Bali: narrow streets, mosques, donkeys1. Inwood2.Fes-al-Bali3.Inwood4. Fes-al-Bal5.Inwood1.Inwood is a different in that it has lots of greenery. It has an old-growth forest, a farmhouse and you can gohiking.2.It’s more than 200 years old and it is no longer a farmhouse. It is now a museum.get lost a wall with gates drive across too narrow for cars walk pedestrians an donkeysReview: Units 1-4CDCCB BADABBAC ABA BDCDBCA ABD CDADtake care of sick telephone office effort spend someone elsehad gone out of town on some sudden unexpected businessI had missed seeing himEnjoyed my sightseeingReview: Units 5-8DDADA BCCBCBA BACBD CADBDC DACB DACcolor fashionable university worn to care for comfortable convenient Although T-shirts are now available in a wide varietymay bear a single wordnew designs are coming up all the time。
<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.A: Do you know that my handbag is missingB: There's a good chance that you will find it in the bedroom..The woman should look for her handbag in the dining room. (岭师分享群4发布)The woman should look for her handbag in the bedroom.Her handbag is probably lost.Her handbag is probably stolen in the shop.A: I had a strange dream last night. I was a prince.B: Well, it's only a dream ...The man's dream is very strange.The man's dream is real.The man shouldn't take the dream too seriously.The man should tell more about his dream.A: John, do you have a minuteB: Yeah. What is it, CarolA: I'm writing my term paper on my computer. But these windows keep popping up all the time. You see that one Do you know what's going onB: Oh, that's a problem. Have you used any software this morningA: I just received my emails and then I used this writing program, as always.B: Then it's really weird. When was the first time you saw these nasty windowsA: This morning ... Oh, I remember ... something was wrong with my computer yesterday. B: What is itA: Um ... when I finished my work yesterday, the computer couldn't be shut off like before. So I just cut the power. Do you think it is connectedB: Maybe. Eh ... then ... what did you do on your computer yesterdayA: Surfing the net, writing the paper ... Oh, there was something more. I chatted with a friend online.B: All right. Now I see. It's probably a virus problem and you probably get it through the chatting program.A: Really Then what can I do nowB: Don't worry about that. I'll fix it.A: Oh, thank you. It's so kind of you.Questions 3 to 5 are based on the conversation you have just heard.What problem does Carol have on her computerShe cannot shut off her computer.Windows keep popping up.She cannot write her paper.The computer cannot be turned on.Carol _____ this morning.received emailssurfed the netdownloaded musicchatted onlineJohn thinks the problem is caused by ____.the chatting programthe email programCarol's carelessnessvirusDirections: In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage, you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).Passage OneThe Bermuda Triangle is an area of water in the North Atlantic Ocean where a large number of planes and boats have gone missing mysteriously. Over the years many explanations have been put forward for the disappearances. Although many of the reports have been exaggerated, there is still no explanation for the large number of disappearances in the area. Scientists now have two best theories for the mystery. One theory is that a giant sea animal lives in the triangle. It takes ships and pulls them down. A scientist once found a 6-foot eel, which is expected to grow 72 feet long. Someone also saw sea monsters. This theory is hard to be proven, but there may just be something in the Bermuda Triangle. The other better theory is the gas theory. Carbon dioxide is a gas that freezes at much warmer temperatures than water. The triangle is full of carbon dioxide and that means that when boats pass through the triangle, the gas can freeze on the base, making the boats sink from the weight. The gas can also explain plane disappearances too.When the engine starts, it can cause the gas in the air to catch fire and make the aircraft explode. The explosion can also explain the strange lights in the triangle.So this theory can explain a lot.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.Where is the Bermuda TriangleIn the North Pacific Ocean.In the South Pacific Ocean.In the North Atlantic Ocean.In the South Atlantic Ocean.A large number of boats and _____ have been reported missing in the area.shipspeoplefishplanesA scientist once found an eel which could grow to _____ long.6 feet12 feet36 feet72 feetCarbon dioxide ________ at much warmer temperature than water.turned into waterexpandsfreezesdisappearsAccording to one explanation, aircrafts explode because _____.the gas in the air catches fire when the engine startssinking boats are explodingthe temperature is too high in the areastrange lights have appeared in the airPassage TwoThe Stonehenge is located in southern England. It is a large circle of stones thatwas built around 2500-1600 . Its purpose still remains a mystery to scientists. Legend says that the heel stone, a famous stone there, was thrown by the devil intoa monk. It struck him on the heel and is still there. People used to believethe giants made the Stonehenge. Now many of them believe that the Stonehenge couldhave been used for religious purposes. It could be a calendar marking an event inthe future, according to its position that matched the stars. The Stonehenge couldhave been built for a religious God. More recently two major new theorieshave been proposed. According to one theory, the Stonehenge was used in a ritual and was joined to Durrington Walls and the River Avon. The area around Durrington Walls was a land of the living, while the Stonehenge was a land of the dead. A journey along the Avon to reach Stonehenge represents a journey from life to death, to honor the people who died in the past. The other theory suggested that Stonehenge was a place of healing. And that is why there are so many graves in the area. However supporters of both theories do agree that the place was probably used for ancestor worship.Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.The Stonehenge in England is _____.no longer a mysterya large circle of stonesa riverside areaa circle of old wallsAccording to the legend, the heel stone was thrown by a devil into a ____.farmermonkgiantwomanWhy could the Stonehenge be used as a calendarBecause people marked important dates on it.Because the number of stones matched the number of days.Because it was located in the middle of England.Because its position matched the stars.One recent theory says that Stonehenge represents a journey _____.from poverty to wealthfrom child to adultfrom life to deathfrom sunrise to sunsetWhat do the two recent theories have in commonBoth of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship gods.Both of them agree that Stonehenge is to worship ancestors.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was built by British people.Both of them agree that Stonehenge was used by the church.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.Sherlock Homes is probably the greatest detective ever known.He never actually existed.He was an imaginary detective who appears in sixty stories.He was very intelligent and successful and solved many cases.He always arrested the criminal.<b>Directions:</b> There is a short text shown on the computer screen (as is shown below). You are required to read the text aloud. Your voice will be recorded into the system. You'll have 1 minute for preparation and then you are required to begin reading when hearing the beginning signal sound and stop it when hearing the ending signal sound. Your reading should be limited within minutes. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.Déjà vu [] is a fancy term, taken from French, which means already seen. It's a feeling you get that you've been somewhere and seen something or done something before. But you know perfectly well that you haven't been there before and haven't seen that or done that before. People get all excited about it, and think maybe they really did that stuff in a previous life or something. I'm a nurse and I've read all about it. What's really going on is some signal activity in the brain. And every now and then one of those signals runs the wrong way. So it's like a false thought. You feel like you were there before but you really weren't. It's just our brains' short-circuiting.<b>Directions:</b> Look at the picture below, which is about a well-known unsolved mystery. You are required to tell 1) what you have read or heard about it; 2) what part of it you believe and why; 3) what part of it you don't believe and why. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.<b>Directions:</b> True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).Looking for Mr. Right Sun-hee: Tara, are you still reading the personal adsTara: Yep.Sun-hee: You know those ads will never help you find a relationship.Tara: Yes, they will! I've already been on three dates.Sun-hee: Yeah. And you're still looking ...Tara: Well, it's just that I haven't found the right person yet.Sun-hee: I don't get it . You've been on three unsuccessful dates, and you still think it's a good idea. WhyTara: Well, for one thing, I wouldn't say all my dates have been completely unsuccessful. I may not have met Mr. Right yet, but I've still had fun.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have fun anywhere. You don't need to go searching through a newspaper for Mr. Right.Tara: Sun-hee, it can happen! My friend Karen just got engaged to a man she met through the personals, and she dated lots of men before she met him.Sun-hee: And that means ... Sun-hee: He's probably a total Romeo ... Romantic ... casual dating ... there's no way he's sincere.Sun-hee: Hmm ... good personality ... looks aren't everything ... sounds likehe might not be too cute.Tara: Why do you say that You've never even met him.Tara: You are so fussy! No wonder you haven't tried dating through the personals yet.Sun-hee: If you must know, I did answer a personal ad ... once.Tara: Yeah What happenedSun-hee: We went out for dinner, and all he did was talk about himself — and his old girlfriend! Oh, it was awful!Tara: OK, that does sound terrible, but they're not all bad.Tara: All right. Let's goTara is reading a magazine.TFTara already has three unsuccessful dates.TFTara's friend Karen married a man she met through the personal ads.TFSun-hee has never tried dating through personal ads.TFIn the end Tara and Sun-hee will go out to answer a personal ad.TF<b>Directions:</b> Fill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have <u>fun</u> anywhere. You don't need to go<u>searching through</u> newspaper for Mr. Right. ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never <u>give up</u> ! Ooh! Here's one: Romantic, <u>handsome</u> ,well-built male <u>looking for</u> attractive female for <u>casualdating</u> . ... Tara: Why do you say that You've never <u>even met</u> him.Sun-hee: Well, first <u>of all</u> , he's writing about his good<u>personality</u> and intelligence. And second of all, he's saying that<u>looks</u> shouldn't be important for the person he dates.Sun-hee: Yeah, but you can have anywhere. You don't need to go newspaper for Mr. Right. ... Sun-hee: And that means ... Tara: Never! Ooh! Here's one: Romantic,, well-built maleattractive female for. ... Tara: Why do you say that You've neverhim. Sun-hee: Well, first, he'swriting about his good and intelligence.And second of all, he's saying that shouldn't be important for the person he dates.<b>Directions: </b>In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), 发布)4(岭师分享群B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.。
Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?〞I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?〞I asked. “I’m fine,〞she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?〞I asked. “Oh yes,〞he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.〞Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find theanswer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun〞that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights〞Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights〞. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1:A.从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.〞and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 51. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.贵州大学法学院法学102班梁江维上传QQ:342113906。
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really…Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories. B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.”I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,”“Family travel,”“Memories of my grandparents,”“Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws”of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories”for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “most likely to succeed”( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “best dressed”(a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as,“We had a lot of fun,”or “I’ll never forget you.”They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws”of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year. 5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mother M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm…I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm…I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening. P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t useyour left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness. In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed. Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek);5. in the eyes;6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. Theyalso believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard. Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.”That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it! Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People havehealthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birthrecords from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. TheUnited States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathingexercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7.judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think? Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,”Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!”Another said, “It’s OK.”The third one said, “No way!”We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way”for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talkedabout the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?”“Why do you like them?”“Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job”doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff! That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashioned Vicki: mother, classicOL2:A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do. 2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”. 4. They just talked about the covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C. 1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary 2. week, Not month 3. six CD covers, not one CD cover 4. a “No way”card, Not an “It’s OK ”cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. …We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, …that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights …a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?”I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?”I asked. “I’m fine,”she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?”I asked. “Oh yes,”he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun”that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly. Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883. Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.”and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded 4. used electricity 5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move. Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.”Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many。
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2unit1听力原文In this section, you will hear several conversations. At the end of each conversation, one or more questions will be asked about what was said. Both the conversations and the questions will be spoken only once. After each question there will be a pause. During the pause, you must read the four choices marked A), B), C) and D), and decide which is the best answer.</text>1A: Lucy, I saw Jeff the other day on the street.B: Oh, I thought he went to New York.<She saw Jeff in New YorkShe was a friend to JeffShe didn't believe Jeff. n>She was surprised to hear that2A: Good morning, your card please.B: I'm sorry this is my first time to borrow books. Can you tell me what to do?<In a school canteen.In a classroom.In a library.In a hospital.A: Good morning, sir. I'm a news reporter from <i>.</i> Now would you mind answering a few questions?B: Uh ... sure.A: What's your name?B: David Brown. My friends call me Dave.A: So, David, what do you do for living?B: I'm a real estate agent.A: That's great. And do you like your job?B: Well ... I should say yes. You know, this isn't an easy job. Spent a lot of time running around, making appointments with people. But I like it. A: Terrific. Where do you want to live?B: Uh ... that depends. Right now I want to live here because Chicago is a big city and I have my job here. But after I retire, I'd like to move to the countryside.A: Sounds interesting. Now who do you think is the most important person in your life?B: My wife of course. She's the mother of our three sons and she's a great mother.A: That's good. Thanks very much for talking to us, David.B: You're welcome.<3 Who is the woman David talks to?A newspaper editor.A news reporter.A writerA researcher.<4Where does David want to live now?In Chicago.< >In New York.In the countryside.In a foreign country.5The most important person in David's life is _____.his fatherhis motherhis sonhis wife/>-"Section B"/>In this section, you will hear several short passages. At the end of each passage,you will hear some questions. Both the passage and the questions will be spoken only once. After you hear a question, you must choose the best answer from the four choices marked A), B), C) and D).-原文Friendship is not a state of mind; it's an act, a balanced relationship between people. It varies from person to person. Our friends are the people who are ready to help us during times of distress, who we share most of our thoughts with. Friendship and love are not quite the same thing, although there's a lot of love around friendship. We are always sure that our friend will understand why we acted in a certain way. We need not explain anything to our very good friends. But the main difference between love and friendship is that in love, the two individuals share a certain intimacy, which is greater than friendship. An important element in love is the physical element. No matter how close you are with your friend, it does not mean physical intimacy. In love, individuals generally have only one partner. You may have many people whom you could call friends but there exists only one person with whom you are in love. A loving relationship makes one so much attached to the other that one feels pain if the other one is hurt. Friendship may last for a lifetime as does love, but then the time spent by the individuals with each other is more exciting in love than in friendship. Life without love is like a year without spring. One could say that love is friendship plus physical closeness.Questions 6 to 10 are based on the passage you have just heard.6 Friends are people with whom _____.we spend time withwe identify ourselveswe share most of our thoughtswe talk about the past</7 What element can be found in love, but not in friendship?Physical closeness.Emotional closenessDeep trust.Willingness to share everything.8.What is TRUE about friends and partners?You can have many friends and many partners.You can have many friends, but only one partner.You can have only one friend, but many partners.You can have only one friend and only one partner.9In a loving relationship, if one is hurt, the other ____.takes care of him/her >comforts him/her >spends much time with him/herfeels pain10.Life without love is like a year without _____.</text>springsummerautumnwinter原文;It is common practice to introduce people when you are starting a friendship. Then what should you do in such introductions? For the first time, introduce individuals to each other using both first and last names. If you're introducing someone who has a title like "doctor", you should include the title as well as the first and last names in the introduction. Introduce the younger or less known person to the older or more famous person first, regardless of the sex of the individuals. However, if a considerable age difference lies between the two, it is far more polite to make introductions out of respect to age, no matter what the social rank is. If the person you are introducing has a specific relationship to you, make the relationship clear by adding a phrase such as "my boss", "my wife" or "my uncle". In the case of unmarried couples who are living together, "companion" and "partner" are good choices. If you are introducing your husband or wife, use your spouse's first and last name if he or she has a different last name than you. Include the phrase "my wife" or "my husband". Introduce an individual to the group first, then the group to the individual. For example: "Dr. Brown, I'd like you to meet my friends Kym Hsu, Shawn Kampbell and Michael Via. Everyone, this is Dr. Kurt Brown."Questions 11 to 15 are based on the passage you have just heard.11.For the first time, you must include a person's ____ in introduction.last name and titlefirst name and titlesocial rankfirst name and last name12 If you are introducing a man and a woman about the same age with one more famous than the other, you should _____.introduce the man to the women firstintroduce the woman to the man firstintroduce the more famous to the less famous firstintroduce the less famous to the more famous first13. If you are introducing your unmarried partner, you can use the word _____.lover >spouse<companionbuddy14How should a man introduce his wife who has a different last name than his?<Using "my wife" onlyUsing her last name and "my wife" only.Using her first name and "my wife" onlyUsing her first name, last name, and "my wife".15.How should you introduce an individual and a group to each other? Introducing everyone in the group to the individual first.Introducing the individual to the group first.Introducing the group as a whole to the individual first.Asking the people in the group to introduce themselves.In this section, you will hear several sentences. Listen carefully and then repeat.">The special person in my family is my grandfather.He’s always kind to me and supportive.We’re colleagues. We work in the same department.We’re both taking accounting this semester.My friends are important to me because I like to go out with them and I can talk to them about most things原文:Last month I received a call, and it was from a college classmate I hadn't seen for years. He said he had just settled down in Shanghai and wanted to come over to visit me. I was overjoyed at that time because he was one of my best friends in college. Then on the following weekend he visited me. That was an old buddy reunion. Sounds good, isn't it? He told me he was working for a big company and that he liked his job very much. After so many years I'm surprised that the man has changed little. Still honest and humorous. And yes, he's going to be married next week and invited me to the wedding party.-<Look at the picture below, which is about Sam, the boy, and a nice man.Something interesting happened between them and became Sam's favorite memory. Suppose you are Sam and now you have grown up. Looking at the picture, you remember what happened and want to share it with us. You'll have 1 minute to prepare and another 2 minutes to complete your presentation. Now you have 1 minute to prepare.<-True or False. Watch the video clip and decide whether the following statements are True (T) or False (F).<text>People We Like Woo Sung: Hi, my name is Woo Sung Chung. Dayanne: Hi, my name is Dayanne Leal. My nickname is Day. D-A-Y. Jonathan: Hi, I'm Jonathan Najman. My nickname is Johnny.Agnes: Hi. I am Agnes Tounkara. My first name, Agnes, is spelled A-G-N-E-S. My last name is spelled T-O-U-N-K-A-R-A.Brad: My name is Brad Fotsch. My first name, Brad, is spelled B-R-A-D.My last name Fotsch, is spelled F-O-T-S-C-H.Calum: Hi. My name is Calum Docherty. I'm from Glasgow in Scotland.I'm 18 years old and I'm a student at Harvard University. Jonathan: I'm from Guatemala City, Guatemala, and I'm a computer engineer.Hana: Hi, my name is Hana Lee. I'm 20 years old. I'm a student at Boston College and l'm from Douglaston, New York.Dayanne: My favorite actor is Antonio Banderas.Woo Sung: My favorite actress is Julia Roberts.Kevin: My favorite actress is Angelina (岭师分享群391337364发布)Jolie because I think she is the most beautiful woman in the world. t> <Dayanne's nickname is Day.</text>TFJonathan's nickname is Najman.TFAgnes's last name is Toukara.TFBrad's nickname is Brady.TFBrad's last name is Fotsch.TF"Section BFill in the blanks. Watch the video clip a and fill in the blanks with the words you hear.->Calum: Hi. <u>My name</u> is Calum Docherty. I'm from Glasgow in <u>Scotland</u> . I'm<u>18 years|eighteen years</u> old and I'm a student at <u>Harvard University</u> .Jonathan: I'm from Guatemala City, Guatemala, and I'm a<u>computer engineer</u> .Hana: Hi, my name is Hana Lee. I'm <u>20 years|twenty years</u> old. I'm a <u>student</u> at Boston College and I'm from Douglaston, <u>New York</u> . ...Kevin: My <u>favorite</u> actress is Angelina Jolie because I think she is the <u>most beautiful</u> woman in the world.(岭师分享群391337364发布)></。
新世纪大学英语(第二版)学术英语视听说教程第2册Unit3_听力原文Whether you love it or hate it, work is a major part of most people’s lives everywhere in the world. Americans are no exception. Americans might complain about “blue Monday,” when they have to go back to work after the weekend, but most of them put a lot of importance on their job, not only in terms of money but also in terms of identity. In fact, when Americans are introduced to a new person, they almost always ask each other, “What do you do?” They are really asking, “What is your job or profession?” Today, however, we won’t look at work in terms of what work means socially or psychologically. Rather, um, we’re going to take a look at work in the United States today in three different ways. First, we’ll take a historical look at work in America. Uh, we’ll do that by looking at how things changed for the American worker from the year 1900 to the year of the latest statistics, 2010. That is, from the beginning of the twentieth century to recent times. Then we’ll look at how U.S. workers are doing today. And after that, we’ll take a look at some possible reasons for the current economic situation. And finally, we’ll look at what people are saying about what the government should and should not do in order to improve the country’s economy.As we look at the changes over the last century or so, we’re going to use a lot of statistics to describe these changes. First, let’s consider how the type of work peo ple were involved in changed. At the beginning of the twentieth century, in 1900, about 38 percent of the workforce was involved in agriculture; that is, they worked on a farm. By the end of the century, only 3percent still worked on farms, and by 2010, only about 1 percent worked in agriculture. There was also a large decrease in the number of people working in industry, that is, in making, or manufacturing, things in factories. The number of workers in industry is down from over 30 percent in 1900 to just over 22 percent in 2010.While the number of people in agriculture and manufacturing industries went down, the number of people in the services went up. As you may know, services, rather than goods or products, provide other less concrete things that people need. A few examples include education, health care, transportation, tourism, banking, advertising, and legal services. Cafes, restaurants, and fast-food outlets like McDonald’s are part of the service sector, as are retail sales jobs, driving taxis, and pumping gas. The services workforce jumped from 31 percent of the workforce in 1900 to 77 percent in 2010.Let’s recap the numbers: in 1900, 38 percent in agriculture;31 percent in industry; and 31 percent in services. In 2010, about 1 percent in agriculture; 22 percent in industry; and 77 percent in services.To put things into perspec tive, let’s compare the United States today to China, where the picture is very different. From your experience, would you expect China to have more workers in agriculture or in industry? Well, it may or may not surprise you, but in China, agriculture takes up only 10 percent of the workforce, industry a huge 47 percent, and services 43 percent. Figures for the entire world are somewhere between China’s and the United Sta tes’ figures: 6 percent, 31 percent, and 63 percent for agriculture, industry, and serv ices, respectively. Let’s get back to the changes in the U.S. workforce in the last centuryor so.There are just two more points I wanted to bring up. First, child labor was not unusual at the beginning of the twentieth century. In 1900, there were 1,750,000 children aged 10 to 15 working full-time in the labor force. This was 6 percent of the labor force. Over the years, child labor laws became much stricter and by 1999, it was illegal for anyone under 16 to work full-time in any of the 50 states. Second, while the number of children in the workforce went down, the number of women went up dramatically. In 1900, only 19 percent of women were employed; in 2010, almost 73 percent of women were holding down jobs.OK, now let’s take a look at how the U.S. workforce is doing today. First, let me say that for much of the twentieth century, U.S. workers saw rising wages, increased benefits like Social Security and health insurance, and better working conditions. However, things are not so rosy for today’s workers. First, let’s look at wages. The U.S. workforce is still considered extremely productive among the industrialized nations of the world, but while its productivity has continued to increase since the 1970s, wages for the working class have not increased. Also the number of the unemployed has been high for some of the past few years.Let me give you some statistics that may help you understand the impact of stagnant wages and high unemployment. Shortly after World War II, a child born in poverty, that is, to a poor family, had a 50 percent chance of being in the middle class as an adult. But by 1980, a person born in poverty had a 40 percent chance. In 2012, economists told us that his or her chance of entering the middle class was only 33 percent.Finally, let’s take a look at some of the possible reasons for the current situation. First of all, agriculture in the United Stateshas become much more mechanized and more efficient, so fewer people are needed to grow crops and raise animals. Most people agree that outsourcing, that is, sending some U.S. manufacturing and service work overseas to countries like China and India that have lower wages, is one reason. At the same time, these countries manufacture products that they can export to the United States and other countries more cheaply than U.S. companies can manufacture them. Also we should keep in mind that some advances in technology have eliminated a lot of the jobs that required workers in the past. I’m thinking of robots in the auto industry and bank ATM machines, for example. In addition to outsourcing and advances in technology, unions, which protect workers’ rights, have become weaker in the past decades. The result is lower wages and even loss of jobs for people from factory workers to teachers. Some economists point out that the American consumer has benefited from outsourcing and technology in that many products are much cheaper. That is cold comfort to millions of workers who have lost their jobs, of course. Let’s look at some mor e reasons.Other possible causes for the economic problems may be government policies and legislation, among them tax cuts and lack of regulation of businesses, especially large corporations and financial institutions such as banks, mortgage companies, and investment firms. T ax cuts mean the government has less money to provide programs to help people in difficulty or to invest in education and research. Lack of regulation of financial institutions has led to their making very risky investments, risky investments that have led to loss of jobs, lost pensions, and loss of homes. It’s important to note, however, that many people believe that high taxes and toomuch regulation pull down the economy.These issues are very difficult ones, and discussions about how to fix the economy can get very heated. Liberals and conservatives blame each other, and the political process seems more polarized than ever before. However, let’s not forget that the United States has survived many economic downturns in the p ast and “cautious optimism” about the U.S. economy seems to be the watchword of the day in newspapers and magazine articles about the economy at this time. Even the prestigious World Economic Forum, which met in Davos, Switzerland, in late January of 2012, expressed optimism and caution, in other words, “cautious optimism.”。
新世纪大学英语时听说教程(第二册)答案Unit 1Optional Listening 1Track2-1-OL-1 Answers2-- passport 1-- diary 3---yearbookTrack2-1-OL-2 Answers1. boyfriend2. Europe, ship3. sixtiesOptional Listening 2Track2-1-OL-4 Answers1. 132. To visit his grandparents.3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman.4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he didn’t even want to go home.Optional Listening 3Track2-1-OL-7 Answers1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, drawings, etc. can be included in scrapbooks.2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when, and why.4. “S chool days”, “Family travel”, “Memori es of my grandparent s”, “Baby’sfirst year.”5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint, and stickers.Optional Listening 4Track2-1-OL-8 Answers1. Most high schools in the U.S.2. Because they are graduating soon.3. Yes.4. At the end of the year.5. It means a student with a good fashion sense.Track2-1-OL-9 Answers2. photo3. seniors4. sports5. yearbook6. titles7. sign8. memories.Optional Listening 5Track2-1-OL-10 Answers1. choose2. wear3. bracelet4. ring5. favorite keepsake6. pendant7. she was in college 8. had no friends 9. remind her to be strong 10. perfect jewelryUnit 2Optional Listening 1Track2-2-OL-1 Answers1. waving to2. shaking hands3. crossing his fingers4. shruggingTrack2-2-OL-2 Answers1. 1.wallet2. nervous3. studying for a test4. the theaterOptional Listening 2Track2-2-OL-4 Answers1. That’s for use2. vacation3. They’re doing great4. project5. AIDS6. drugsOptional Listening 3Track2-2-OL-6 Answers1. People shake hands.: Bangladesh Indonesia The United Arab Emirates2. People bow. : Indonesia, Thailand3. People give business cards. : Indonesia4. There are rules about touching. : Bangladesh, Thailand5. Donn’t wave at people here. : Bangladesh6. There aren’t many hand gestures.: Bangladesh Thailand7. People don’t wink.: Bangladesh,8. Don’t use your left hand here. : Indonesia The United Arab Emirates9. Don’t point at people with your finger. : The United Arab EmiratesOptional Listening 4Track2-2-OL-8 Answers1. shake hands2. Japan, bow3. Maori4. Brazil, kiss ( each other on the cheek)5. in the eyes6. Japan, embarrassedOptional Listening 5Track2-2-OL-9 Answers1. traditional2. greetings3. learning4. trip5. nervous6. business card7. jump and nod8. for luck9. start laughing 10. relax and have funUnit 3Optional listening 1A--Answer:We should support and celebrate local food traditions.B--Answers:1. 1.fast2. life3. farmers4. Europe5. membersOptional listening 2A--Answers:Adam: buttery Janet: spicy Abby: sweet Minh: healthyOptional listening 3A--Answers:1.F2.T3.F4.F5.T6.FB--Answers:Capsaicin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. Ithas no flavor or smell.Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.Optional listening 4A--Answers:What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish;What they drink: water, green tea;How they exercise: gardening, walking;How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massageB--Answers:The Okinawans’secret: First, they eat a healthy diet. Second, they don’t do hard exercise. Third, the older Okinawans have a good attitude about aging.Unit 4Optional listening 1A--Answers: Elena: New York; Vicki: Hong KongB--Answers: Gio: brother/casual;Elena: store in neighborhood/retro, old-fashioned;Vicki: mother/classicOptional listening 2A--Answers: f. c. b.B--Answers:1. 1.You could look for friends on the Internet.2. 2.You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. 3.You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delaytaking the test.Optional listening 3A--Answers: 1. b 2. aB--Answers:1. 1.Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time2. 2.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearances.Optional listening 4A--Answers:A trendspotter finds things that are new and popular. Companies might hiretrendspottersto help them make new products.B--Answers:1. 1.She was nervous and didn’t know what to do.2. 2.She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.3. 3.They had to decide which song was “Yes---All the way!”, which one was“Ok”, and which one was “No way”.4. 4.They just talked about the covers they liked.5. 5.They are going to look at some new fashions.C--Answers:1. 1.doesn’t pay, NOT has a good salary2. 2.week, NOT month3. 3.six CD covers, NOT only one CD cover4. 4.A “No way” card, NOT an “It’s OK” cardUnit 5Optional Listening 1Track2-5-OL-1 Answers2. saw the lights3. told a police officer4. tried to take pictures5. called his wife Track2-5-OL-2Answers: Nick Brown,police officer, local peopleOptional Listening 2Track2-5-OL-3Answers1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road.2. Because it was raining heavily.3. He stopped the car quickly.4. She said ”I `m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.1. heavily2. clearly3. slowly4. neatly5. quickly6. strangely7. happily8. quietly9. Nervously 10. calmlyOptional Listening 3Track2-5-OL-5 Answers1. A terrible explosion2. In eastern Russia.3. June 30, 1908.Track2-5-OL-6 Answers: (first row) 4, 1, 3; (second row) 5, 2Track2-5-OL-7 Answers1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOptional Listening 4Track2-5-OL-8 Answers2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cTrack2-5-OL-9 Answers1. 1.Different people see different lights.2. 2.Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. 3.The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to earth.4. 4.A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery. Optional Listening 51. 1.solve2. it’s very likely3. stole4. apartment5. showing6. has an alibi7. it isn’t true8. walks in9. takes out 10. thiefUnit 6Optional Listening 1Track2-6-OL-1Answers (1-r)2, 3, 1Track2-6-OL-2 Answers 1.no one 2. couldn’t run 3. can’t swimOptional Listening2Track2-6-OL-3 Answers1. pink2. living room, kitchen3. largeTrack2-6-OL-4 Answers1. True2. False; didn’t speak or smile3. False; all4. False; sitting5. TrueOptional Listening 3Track2-6-OL-5 Answers1. Stage 52. Stage 13. Stage 24. Stage 3 and 4Track2-6-OL-6 Answers1. 1.Four or five times.2. In stages 3 and 4.3. Fifteen or sixteen hours a day.4. Sleep is very important for learning.Optional Listening 4Track2-6-OL-7 Answers1. many times2. don’t remember3. very active4. Greeks and Romans5. can tell us about our daily livesTrack2-6-OL-8 Answers1. True2. True3. False4. FalseOptional Listening 5Track2-6-OL-9 Answers1. strange2. daytime3. pajamas4. laughed5. reminded him of6. hugged7. shook Roberto’s hand8. ballet dancer9. finished talking 10. showed Roberto a surpriseUnit 7Optional Listening 1A—Answers Mark: Nebuta Marissa: HoliB—Answer Mark: 2, 4, 1, 3 Marissa: 2, 4, 3, 1Optional Listening 2A—Answers 1.c 2.aB—Answers 1. M 2. D 3. M 4. M 5. DC—Answers 1. gets very crowded 2. after you arrive 3. The most important event4. just relax and have fun5. before6. finishesOptional Listening 3A—Answers 1. F 2. T 3. F 4.T 5.F 6.TB--Answers1. You might need a jacket, sunglasses, an umbrella, or all three.2. Get there early, about 4 hours ahead of big parades. For the Sunday night parade, finda space in the morning.3. Start making reservations in August. Don’t wait until January.4. People ride on floats in the parades and give “throws” to the crowd.5. Before Mardi Gras even begins, there are over 70 parades of dazzling floats.6. Many streets are closed to cars, and bus and streetcar schedules often changed.Optional Listening 4A—Answer: b. People use a groundhog to predict the weather.B—Answers:1. F; Not large black, but small brown2. T3. T4. F; Not 1995, but 19935. F; Not doesn’t usually see, but usually seesOptional Listening 5Answers: 1. bring 2. would like to 3. promised 4. project 5. invites6. agrees and calls7. in interested in8. go to the party9. funny part10. planning to goUNIT 8Optional Listening 1B--Answers 1, 2, 5, 7, 8C--Answers 2, 3Optional Listening 2A--Answers affordable; convenientB—Answers 1.all 2.all EXCEPT library books3.all EXCEPT clean and brush your petOptional Listening 3A--Answers 5; cars, buses, subway, bicycling, walkingB--Answers 1. Neither 2.Both 3.Bogota’ 4.Both5.Both6.Curitiba7.Neither8.Bogota’Optional Listening 4B—Answers Inwood: eagles, an old forest, an old farmhouseFes-al-Bali: narrow streets, mosques, donkeysC--Answers1. Inwood2.Fes-al-Bali3.Inwood4. Fes-al-Bal ••。
新世纪大学英语2 optional listeningUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box? Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes. B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather! B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book ofmemories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said,“Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home! Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,”“Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will makeyour scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities.These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). Ther e are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home. OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginati on to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7.sign; 8. memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry. Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your moth er M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening. P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use m any gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. Hejust smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poin t at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS;6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of theworlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard. Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it! Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually pr efer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. Th ey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe; 5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with;7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown g irl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be com fortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expe rt’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popula r right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for o ur tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout. Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story justin. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walke d away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a“supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a smal l town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Dif ferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any c lothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep. Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several。
新世纪大学英语2 optional listening欧阳家百(2021.03.07)Unit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I w rote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high schoo l book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings,journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home. OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your motherM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now. W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you. W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris. 3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: F or what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week. M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many g estures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. pr oject; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That mean s I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They ea t many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it brightorange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; Howthey exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judgingstarts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t under stand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comforta ble! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trend spotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Tren ds Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular rig ht now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our to ur. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to se em like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked awa y quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small tow n in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Differen t people see different lights. They are not always the same.I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I d on’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothe s on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ran towa rd me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a microwave oven, an electric mixer, and a food processor. I liked the food processor the most,。
新世纪大学英语2 optionalUnit One, Book 2Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…. that’s my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s persona l! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we put this box away and…Listening 2At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit my grandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, but my mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. My grandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed there for two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in Los Angeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didn’t want to go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to hold special memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journal entries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years. Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook pages. Some examples: “School days,” “ Family travel,” “Memories of my grandparents,”“ Baby’s first year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are better than ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anything made of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page and move them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pages with felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to write down the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When, and Why. This will make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Listening 4Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbook comes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the school year---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behind the seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The last photos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not only about students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academic subjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do after school, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbook club. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for the yearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote and choose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed” ( a student everyone thinks will besuccessful), and the “ best dressed” (a student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards and categories. Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially important for the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” or “ I’ll never forget you.” They also write about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbookB. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3. sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long time to a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lots of interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold special memories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Old newspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “School days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”,“Baby’s first year”.5. Use imaginat ion to design the pages, and then decorate them with felt pens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon. 3.Yes; 4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashion sense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7. she was in college;8. had no friends;9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfect jewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone.2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mot herM: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater?M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.P: You’re really busy!J: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adam is going to PacificUniversity.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?P: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS and drugs in our community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and then putting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch people on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet are very dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the same time. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your right hand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their hands together and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public. Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot. They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When two men meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together. Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesn’t shake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something, give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t poi nt at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. When women meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss male friends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes. This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meet someone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing their noses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people of New Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business, people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchange business cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. This is polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. It usually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks something is funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. project; 5. AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each other on the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. business card; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For some people, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life. The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the local food traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an international movement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The Slow Food movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciate delicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment. In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only one problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter. It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thai food! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. I came home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland--- I don’t like it anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” Tha t means I like to eat sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything with chocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foods all the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually p refer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grew the first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plant spread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbus brought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicin has no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because they are rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach, and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people lose weight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai food spicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile pepper everyday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gave them to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. People have healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, the Okinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and town birth records from 1879. They didn’t expect to find many centenarians in the records. They were very surpri sed to find so many old and healthy people living in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per 100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. T hey eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of water and green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthy habits as well. They don’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting or jogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking. Researchers say thatolder Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging. They sit quietly and relax their minds withdeep breathing exercised. They also enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast; 2.life; 3. farmers; 4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that produces heat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero is the hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in the Caribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink: water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax: deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. gets covered with; 7. judging starts;8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted; 10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all the time.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fashionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!V: I’m from Hong Kong.I: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do?B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.B: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear pants after all. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Thursday.A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!欧阳科创编 2021.02.05Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hair red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be co mfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, no jewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my hai r red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. A business wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. If you want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in your free time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. She doesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeans and a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I just want to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Exp ert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with your girlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste. In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous and didn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! I’m telling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then she gave us a tour. That was really cool! Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person three cards. One card said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” The third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. After each song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock, heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” for me.Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popul ar right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six different CD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didn’t have cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandy asked us questions, “Which ones do you like?” “Why do you like them?” “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutique downtown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to a different location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This “job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1:A Elena: New YorkVicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usualElena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. fc b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had better not delay taking the test. OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off, in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.OL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.2. She had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song was “OK”, and which one was “No way”.4. They just talked about the covers they liked.5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month3. six CD covers, not one CD cover4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” cardOL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired; 6.stop to rest; 7. had better; 8. get some ice cream; 9. of all athletes; 10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So, we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good we ekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this story just in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw some strange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lights were bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas station and talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seen the lights, too.M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story. What happened next?A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in his camera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, the lights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysterious lights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to seem like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa? A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2It was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. I drove slowly. Suddenly, I saw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle of the road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “What are you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. “Are you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walk ed away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in. I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked. “Oh yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on that road. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, a terrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground, and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard the explosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are still trying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around in space and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Some of them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, it would cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails. They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was near Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed into the ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so they aimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistake during an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried to build a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gun and it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a sma ll town in west Texas in the United States. It’s famous for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Di fferent people see different lights. They are not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky. They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. N o. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago. The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didn’t have cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lights were stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes the lights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning is lightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so.Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan one time. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3B. Nick Brown, police officer, local peopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it was raining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked away quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident five years ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly; Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3(second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off2. lots of damage3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a3. h4. d5. g6. e7. b8. cB. 1. different people see different lights2. Robert Ellison saw the lights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment; 5. showing; 6. has an alibi; 7. it isn’t true;8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was in a classroom at school, but I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked at me, but I was really embarrassed. Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.Male child: Oh, what a terrible dream. I dreamed I was on a dark street. Suddenly, there was a large dog behind me. It ra n toward me, but I couldn’t move.Woman: Don’t worry, Jesse. It was only a dream. Go back to sleep.Conversation 3Man1: Morning Tim.Man2: Morning. Hey, I had an amazing dream last night. I was on a beautiful boat. The sun was warm and the ocean was really blue. I jumped into the water, and I began to swam with the fish. The thing is, I can’t swim. But in the dream, I could. It was pretty cool.Optional Listening 2I had an amazing dream last night. I was standing outside of an strange big house. The house was painted pink, a very rare color for a house. It had a lot of big windows, either round or rectangular. The house had large square pillars and twisted columns. I was thinking there must be a big living room, several bedrooms, a kitchen, and a guest room in such a big house. I was wondering whose house this was when I suddenly heard a voice from somewhere: “My lord, welcome home.” Wow, this was my dream house.I went inside and walked into my living room. It was spacious. There were sofas, a table, a big-screen TV, and a stereo system. It was pretty cool. All my best friends were there, too. But somehow they didn’t speak, didn’t smile, and didn’t even move. And then suddenly they all disappeared. I was scared. What a terrible dream.I then went to the kitchen. It was also spacious. There were all kinds of kitchen equipment, including a gas stove, a refrigerator, and an oven. There also many electric appliances, such as a。
新世纪大学英语视听说教程2的optional listening 原文及答案免费下载Unit One, Book 22-1-3------- 2-1-4 ------ Listening 1Boy: Hey, Grandma, what’s in this box?Grandma: Oh, nothing really… Just a few old keepsakes.B: Keepsakes?G: Young man, you know what a keepsake is !B: No, I don’t. I really don’t.G: Well, it’s something you keep. It’s something that gives you a lot of memories.B: Oh. What’s this?G: Now don’t go just digging around in there! ... Hmmm, let’s see…my first diary.B: Can I….?G: No, you can’t read it! It’s personal! I wrote about my first boyfriend in there. He became your grandfather!B: Oh, ok…. Well then, what’s that? It has your picture in it.G: That’s my passport. YOU can see, I traveled to Europe by ship.B: What’s that big book?G: My yearbook. It’s my high school book of memories.B: Class of 1961! Boy, that’s old!G: That’s about enough out of you, young man. I think it’s time we pu box away and…At the age of thirteen, I took my first trip alone. I went to visit mygrandparents in Los Angeles. I felt very nervous about traveling so far, butmy mother said, “Don’t worry. You’ll be fine.” I got on the airplane and talked for a long time to a very nice woman who sat next to me. Mygrandparents met me at the airport and took me to their home. I stayed therefor two weeks, and I had so much fun with them! It was my first time in LosAngeles, and I saw lots of really interesting places. In the end, I didnto go home!Listening 3Making memoriesA popular new hobby is scrapbooking---making beautiful books to holdspecial memories. Scrapbook pages can include photos, drawings, journalentries. It’s not hard to make a scrapbook that you will enjoy for many years.Here are the steps..1. Choose a theme for your scrapbook page s. Some examples: “School“ Baby’s firstdays,”“ Family travel,”“Memories of my grandparents,”year.”2. Select photos for each page. Two or three really good photos are betterthan ten so-so photos.3. Find other paper keepsakes to use with your photos. Look for oldnewspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters--- anythingmade of paper. Use your imagination!4. Design the pages. Put photos and keepsakes together on each page andmove them around until you find a layout that you like.5. Glue your photos and keepsakes into place. Then decorate your pageswith felt pens, paint, and stickers. Use your imagination!6. Label your pages. This is the most important step! Remember to writedown the “5 Ws” of your photos: Who, What, Where, When,and Why. Thiswill make your scrapbook much more interesting and valuable in the future.Yearbooks in the United StatesMost high schools in the United States publish a yearbook. The yearbookcomes out once a year, usually in the spring. It is a record of the schoolyear---- a “book of memories” for the students.Inside a yearbook is each student’s photo. The seniors are graduating soon, and their photos appear first. Next are the juniors. They are one year behindthe seniors. Next come the sophomores, or second-year students. The lastphotos are the first-year students, the freshmen. The yearbook is not onlyabout students. The teachers have photos, too.The yearbook also has photos and descriptions of sports teams, academicsubjects, and extracurricular activities. These are activities students do afterschool, such as the chess club and Spanish club. There is even a yearbookclub. Students in this club write, design, and take photos all year for theyearbook. At the end of the year, the book is printed.In the yearbook, some students receive special titles. The seniors vote andchoose the “class clown”( a funny student), the “ most likely to succeed student everyone thinks will be successful), and the “ best dressed”student with a good fashion sense). There are also other awards andcategories.Students typically sign each other’s yearbooks. This is especially importantfor the seniors, because they are graduating. Students write notes to each“ I’ll never forget you.” They also other, such as, “ We had a lot of fun,” orwrite about all the fun and funny experiences they shared in school together.Keys:OL1: A. 2-passport; 1-diary; 3-yearbook B. 1. boyfriend 2. Europe, ship 3.sixtiesOL2: B. 1.13; 2. To vist his grandparents; 3. Yes. He talked for a long timeto a nice woman; 4. He had lots of fun with his grandparents and he saw lotsof interesting places. In the end, he even didn’t want to go home.OL3: B. 1. Scrapbooking is making beautiful books to hold specialmemories. Photos, pictures, etc. can be included in scrapbooks. 2. Oldnewspaper clippings, postcards, tickets, report cards, letters.3. The “5 Ws” of the photos: who, what, where, when and why.4. “S,“Baby’s first year”. days”, “Family travel”, “Memories of my grandparents”5. Use imagination to design the pages, and then decorate them with feltpens, paint and stickers.OL4: A 1. Most high school in the US; 2. Because they are graduating soon.3.Yes;4. At the end of the year.5.It means a student with a good fashionsense.B. 2. photo; 3. seniors; 4. sports; 5. yearbook; 6. titles; 7. sign; 8.memoriesOL51. choose;2. wear;3. bracelet;4. ring;5. favorite keepsake;6. pendant;7.she was in college; 8. had no friends; 9. remind her to be strong; 10. perfectjewelry.Unit 2, Book 2Optional Listening 11Man: Where are you running to, Paula?Woman I have Connie’s wallet. I need to give it to her.M: Come on. I’ll help you.W: I don’t see Connie anywhere.M: Look! She’s over there. Standing at the bus stop.W: Oh yeah, I see her. Connie! Connie!M: She doesn’t see us.W: You’re right, It’s too noisy, and she’s talking to someone. 2M: Well, here we are. This is my mom’s house.W: It’s beautiful.M: Hey, Jen. Are you okay?W: I’m just a little nervous. It’s my first time meeting your mother M: Come on. Don’t worry. Here she is now.W2: Hi, Tim!M: Hi, Mon. I’d like you to meet Jen.W2: Hi, Jen. It’s very nice to meet you.W: It’s nice to meet you, too. Mrs. Harris.3M: Hey, Anne. Where are you going?W: I’m going to the library to study.M: For what? It’s only 7:00 a.m.!W: My final exams. They’re next week.M: Wow, well, good luck!W: Thanks!4.W: Bill, it’s late. Where’s the theater? M: Hmmm… I think it’s near here.W: Are you sure? What street is this?M: Uhm… I don’t know.W: Where’s the map? I want to check.Optional Listening 2Paula: So, Jane, what are you doing these days?Jane: I’m working in an office. And I’m studying computer science in the evening.ly busy!P: You’re realJ: That’s for sure! And in my free time, I’m learning Spanish for my vacation. I’m planning a trip to Mexico next year.P: What about your brothers? How are they doing?J: They’re doing great! Alex is helping our father in his business, and Adamis going to Pacific University.P: How nice!J: Paula, how about you? How are you doing these days?P: I’m doing great, too. I’m working on a project about community safety.J: Community safety?nd drugs inP: Yeah. We’re planning a campaign against theft, fire ,AIDS aour community.J: Oh, that sounds interesting!P: Yes, indeed it is interesting, and it is very important to the community.Optional Listening 3Know before you go!In Bangladesh people greet their friends by shaking hands softly and thenputting their hands over their heart. People in Bangladesh don’t use many gestures. Waving at people and winking are very rude. Don’t touch peop on the head. Don’t point with your foot---Bangladeshi people think feet arevery dirty.Indonesians greet people with a long handshake, and they bow at the sametime. At a meeting, give every person your business card, but use your righthand----using your left hand is very rude in Indonesia.In Thailand, the traditional greeting is called wai----people put their handstogether and bow. Men and women don’t often touch each other in public.Thai people don’t use their hand for gestures, but they love to smile a lot.They sometimes laugh when they feel nervous or embarrassed.People in the United Arab Emirates have some special gestures. When twomen meet, they shake hands. Sometimes old men touch noses together.Women kiss their friends on the cheek. If a man meets a woman, he doesnshake hands with her. He just smiles. When you give your friend something,give it to him with your right hand. Don’t use your left hand. And don’t point at peopole with your finger. Use your hand to gesture towards them.Optional Listening4World greetingsIn Brazil men often shake hands when they meet for the first time. Whenwomen meet, they kiss each other on the cheek. Women also kiss malefriends to say hello. When you shake hands, look at the person in the eyes.This shows interest and friendliness.In New Zealand, usually, both men and women shake hands when they meetsomeone for the first time. Fun fact: If you see two people pressing theirnoses together, they are probably Maori. The Maori are the native people ofNew Zealand. This is their traditional greeting.In Japan when people meet for the first time, they usually bow. In business,people also shake hands. In formal situations, people often exchangebusiness cards. When you give a business card, give it with both hands. Thisis polite. Special note: In Japan, a smile can have different meanings. Itusually means that the person is happy. or that the person thinks somethingis funny. But it also mean that the person is embarrassed.Keys:OL1: A. 1. waving to; 2. shaking hands; 3. crossing his fingers; 4. shruggingB. 1. wallet; 2. nervous; 3. studying for a test; 4.the theater.OL 2: B. 1. That’s for sure; 2. vacation; 3. They’re doing great; 4. proje AIDS; 6. drugs.OL 4: B 1. shake hands; 2. Japan, bow; 3. Maori; 4. Brazil, kiss(each otheron the cheek); 5. in the eyes; 6. Japan, embarrassed.OL 5: 1. traditional; 2.greetings; 3.learning; 4.trip; 5. nervous; 6. businesscard; 7. jump and nod; 8. for luck; 9. start laughing; 10. relax and have funUnit 3, Book 2Optional listening 1Today our lives are busier than they were 10 or 20 years ago. For somepeople, this is a problem. They think we should slow down and enjoy life.The Slow Food movement was started to celebrate and support the localfood traditions of the worlds. Its members don’t like fast food or instant foods because they think those foods are unhealthy.The Slow Food movement started in Europe, but now it is an internationalmovement. There are more than 65,000 members in 45 countries. The SlowFood movement’s members think we need to slow down and appreciatedelicious traditional foods. They also believe in protecting the environment.In addition, they believe in supporting local farmers and their products.Optional Listening 2Adam: I’m about 20 pounds overweight. I went on a diet. There’s only problem: I just love buttery foods. Everyone says that I should eat less butter.It’s hard.Janet: I lived in Thailand for six months. It was really fun. I really like Thaifood! It’s too spicy for some people, but not for me. I love the peppers. II don’t like itcame home a month ago. The food here tastes so bland---anymore.Abby: My mother says that I have a “sweet tooth.” That means I like to ea sweet foods. Dessert is my favorite part of any meal. I like anything withchocolate in it!Minh: I’m training for a swimming competition. I have to eat healthy foodsall the time. At first I didn’t like it, but now I do. I actually prefer healthy foods to sweet or buttery foods. And I feel better, too!Optional Listening 3Hot, hotter, hottest! Surprising facts about chile peppers.1. Chile peppers are one of the oldest food crops in the world. Farmers grewthe first chile peppers more than 9,000 years ago.2. The first chile peppers probably grew in Bolivia. From there, the plantspread through South America and the Caribbean. Christopher Columbusbrought the first chile peppers to Europe.3. The heat in the chile comes from a chemical called capsaicin. Capsaicinhas no smell or flavor, but it mikes your mouth fee “hot.”4. Scientists believe that chile peppers are a very healthy food because theyare rich in vitamins. Research shows that chiles do not damage the stomach,and Indian scientists discovered that eating chiles can help people loseweight.5. Indian food is well-known for using lots of chile peppers, but Thai foodspicier. The average person in Thailand eats five grams of chile peppereveryday---the most in the world.6. The Aztec Indians of Mexico loved chile peppers so much that they gavethem to their king as a gift.7. The hottest chile pepper in the world is the habanero. It is bright orangeand grows in the Caribbean.8. There are chile sauce factories on every continent except Antarctica.Optional Listening 4In many countries of the world, people are living longer than before. Peoplehave healthier lifestyles, and healthcare is better, too.Okinawa is an island off the coast of Japan. The people on Okinawa, theOkinawans, may have the longest lives and healthiest lifestyles in the world.Researchers did a study. They started their study by looking at city and townect to find many centenarians in the birth records from 1879. They didn’t exprecords. They were very surprised to find so many old and healthy peopleliving in Okinawa. The United States, for example, has 10 centenarians per100,1000 people. In Okinawa there are 34 centenarians per 100,100 people!What is the Okinawans’ secret? First, they eat a healthy diet. They eat many fresh fruits and vegetables. They also eat fish often and drink a lot of waterand green tea. But researchers think that the Okinawans have other healthyhabits as well. They d on’t do hard exercise such as weightlifting orjogging--- instead, they prefer relaxing activities like gardening and walking.Researchers say that older Okinawans also have a good attitude about aging.They sit quietly and relax their minds with deep breathing exercised. Theyalso enjoy massage.Keys:OL1: A. We should support and celebrate local food tradition; B. 1. fast;2.life;3. farmers;4. Europe;5. members.OL2: A. Adam: buttery; Janet: spicy; Abby: sweet; Minh: healthy.OL3: A. F T F F T F; B Capsacin is a chemical in the chile that producesheat and makes your mouth feel hot. It has no flavor or smell. Habanero isthe hottest chile pepper in the world. It it bright orange and grows in theCaribbean.OL4: A. What they eat: fresh fruits and vegetables, fish; What they drink:water, green tea; How they exercise: gardening, walking How they relax:deep breathing exercises, massage.OL5: 1. contest; 2. tomatoes; 3. adding; 4. spicier; 5. comes off; 6. getscovered with; 7. judging starts; 8. tastes the other dishes; 9. has ever tasted;10. win the test.Unit 4, Book 2Optional Listening 11.Interviewer (Int): Hi, what’s your name?Gio: Gio.Int: Hi, Gio, Where are you from?G: Milan, Italy.I: Welcome to New York, them!G: Thank you.I: Where are your clothes from?G: My brother. I’m always borrowing clothes.I: How would you describe your style?G: Casual, I guess. I’m not very innovative. I just wear the same thing all thetime.2.I: Hi, there.Elena: Hi,I: Who are you?E: I’m Elena.I: And where are you from?E: I’m from right here in New York.I: A hometown girl. And your clothes are from…?E: A store in my neighborhood. There was a sale.I: Great! How would you describe your personal style?E: Retro. It’s fashionable now.I: It looks old-fash ionable now. ….in a good way, of course.3.I: Good evening. What is your name?V: Vicki.I: You look beautiful.V: Thank youI: That dress is very stylish.V: My mother gave it to me. It was tailor-made!I: Wonderful. Where are you from, Vicki!om Hong Kong.V: I’m frI: How would you describe your personal sense of style?V: Classic, I suppose. I like to dress up.Optional Listening 21A: I’m new in town and I’d like to make some friends. What should I do? B: You ought to join a sports club.A: But I don’t like sports.B: You could look for friends on the Internet.2A: I don’t know what to wear to the party tonight. What should I wear?B: You could wear your new jeans or your black pants.A: It’s a formal dress party.nts after all. You definitely ought to wear aB: Oh, then you shouldn’t wear padress.3A: I still don’t understand this grammar. What should I do?B: You had better get some help or you will fail the test. It’s on Th A: Maybe I could take the test on Friday. That would give me extra time.B: Well, you had better not delay. There’s not much time!Optional Listening 3A--A sense of style1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, nojewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye m red. What do you think?2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. Shedoesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeansand a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like a fashion magazine. I justwant to be comfortable! What’s your advice?B1. I’m a salesclerk in a woman’s clothing store. My boss is great, but she has a very strict dress code. We have to wear long skirts, black shoes, nojewelry, and on and on. It’s really boring, so I’m planning to dye my ha red. What do you think?Expert’s opinion: Sorry, but I have to side with your employer. Abusiness wants to have a particular look, so they tell you what to wear. Ifyou want to show off your individual style, you had better do it in yourfree time.2. I love my girlfriend, but she complains a lot about my clothes. Shedoesn’t want to go anywhere with me because I always wear old jeansfashion magazine. I justand a T-shirt. I don’t care about looking like awant to be comfortable! What’s your advice?Expert’s opinion: I think you ought to have a serious talk with yourgirlfriend and explain how you feel. We all have our own style and taste.In my opinion, she thinks too much about appearances.Optional Listening 4Today I started my new part-time job as a trendspotter. I was nervous anddidn’t know what to expect. Well, guess what? It was a lot of fun! Itelling all my friends, “You should think about becoming a trendspotter, too”On Saturday morning, we had to report to a recording studio by 10 a.m.The “Trends Coordinator,” Mandy, explained the schedule. Then shegave us a tour. That was really cool!Next we sat around a big table in a room. They gave each person threecards. One ca rd said “Yes—All the way!” Another said, “It’s OK.” Th third one said, “No way!” We listened to about 10 different songs. Aftereach song we had to hold up a card. They played some hip hop, rock,for me.heavy metal; and dance music. The heavy metal was “No way” Do you know the rock group called “Gifted”? They’re really popular right now. Well, they have a new CD coming out. We saw six differentCD covers. (I guess they are trying to choose one.) This time, we didnhave cards. Instead, we just talked about the covers we liked. Mandyasked us questions, “Which ones do you like?”“Why do you like them “Would you buy a CD with this cover?”We finished at 12:30. We will meet again next week at a boutiquedowntown. We will look at some new fashions. Each week we go to adifferent location. Oh yes, we also received a free CD for our tour. This“job” doesn’t pay, but we get a free stuff!That’s all for now!KeysOL1: A Elena: New York Vicki: Hong KongB. Gio: brother/usual Elena: store in neighborhood /retro, old-fashionedVicki: mother, classicOL2:A. f c b B. 1. You could look for friends on the internet.2. You shouldn’t wear pants. You definitely ought to wear a dress.3. You had better get some help or you will fail the test. You had betternot delay taking the test.OL3 A. b a B. Sorry, but I have to side with, want to show off,in your free time.have a serious talk, style and taste, too much about appearance.2. She had toOL4 B. 1. She was nervous and didn’t what to do.report to a recording studio by 10 a.m. 3. They had to decide which song4. They just talked about thewas “OK”, and which one was “No way”.covers they liked. 5. They are going to look at some new fashions.C.1. doesn’t pay, Not a good salary2. week, Not month 3. six CDcovers, not one CD cover 4. a “ No way” card, Not an “It’s OK ” card OL5: 1. jogging; 2.more and more; 3. disagrees; 4. increase; 5. gets tired;6.stop to rest;7. had better;8. get some ice cream;9. of all athletes;10.afer a workout.Unit 5, Book 2Optional Listening 1Mike: …So,we can look forward to warmer temperature. It’ll be a good weekend for the beach. Over to you, Alexa.Alexa: Thank you for that weather report, Mike. And finally, this storyjust in. … We have a report that a local man, Nick Brown, saw somestrange lights. He was driving home at about 10 p.m. He said the lightswere bright and they moved across the sky. He stopped at a gas stationand talked to a police officer about the lights. The police officer had seenthe lights, too.What happened next?M: Hmmm, … that’s strange story.A: Well, Mr. Brown took some pictures, but there was no film in hiscamera. Finally, he called his wife on his cell phone. But by that time, thelights were gone.M: Well, I know that there is a legend around here about mysteriouslights … a lot of local people have seen the lights. It’s starting to see like those lights really exist.. What do you think, Alexa?A: I don’t believe it. I think it’s some kind of hoax!Optional Listening 2drove slowly. Suddenly, IIt was raining heavily. I couldn’t see clearly. Isaw a young girl. She was dressed neatly and standing in the middle ofthe road. I was surprised! Somehow, I stopped the car quickly. “W you doing?” I asked. She looked at me strangely but didn’t answer. you OK?” I asked. “I’m fine,” she answered. Then she smiled happily and walked away quietly. Nervously, I drove to my hotel and checked in.I told the clerk about the little girl. “Do you know her?” I asked.yes,” he said calmly. “That’s Mary Anne. She died five years ago on thatroad. It was a car accident during a rainstorm.”Optional Listening 3A. The Tunguska mysteryIt was early morning, June 30, 1908, in eastern Russia. Suddenly, aterrible explosion rocked the forest in Tunguska. People fell to the ground,and all the trees for 2000 square kilometers were down. People heard theexplosion 800 kilometers away, and the fire burned for many weeks.B. What caused this terrible explosion? A century later, scientists are stilltrying to find the answer. Here are some possible explanations.1. An asteroid: Asteroids are very large pieces of rock that goes around inspace and sometimes hit the planet. They can cause lots of damage. Someof them weigh as much as 100,00 tons. If an asteroid hit the earth, itwould cause a huge explosion.2. A comet: Comets are giant balls of gas, ice., and rock with long tails.They travel through space in a regular pattern. Encke’s Comet was n Earth in1908, and it’s possible that a part of it broke off and hit the earth.3. An UFO accident: Some people believe that a spaceship crashed intothe ground in Siberia and its engine exploded.4. An extraterrestrials might have wanted to destroy the earth, so theyaimed their weapons at Earth and set fire to the forest.5. A scientific experiment: Another idea is that scientists made a mistakeduring an experiment with electricity. A man named Nikola Tesla tried tobuild a “supergun” that used electricity. Maybe it was a test of his gunand it didn’t work correctly.Optional Listening 4Q. Where is Marfa and what exactly is it famous for?A. Marfa is a small town in west Texas in the United States. It’s for the “Marfa mystery lights”Q. What are the mystery lights exactly?A. No one knows for sure. There are many different ideas about that.Q. Can you describe them?A. That’s a difficult question. Different people see different lights. Theyare not always the same. I can say that they appear after sunset in the sky.They dance mysteriously in air and vanish. Then they suddenly reappear.Q. Some people say they are car headlights. Do you think so?A. No. I don’t. A man first saw the mystery lights over 100 years ago.The man was Robert Ellison and the year was 1883. Of course we didnhave cars in 1883.Q. What do you think causes the lights?A. There are many theories. The Native Americans thought the lightswere stars falling to Earth. Some people think uranium gas causes thelights. Other people suggest that ball lightning does it. Ball lightning islightning in the shape of circle. It often appears just after a rainstorm.Q What are some of the weirdest ideas about the lights?A. Well, some people call them “ghost lights”. They think ghosts do it. That’s the strangest idea. Some say they are UFOs. I don’t think so. Q. What do the experts say?A. They can’t figure it out. Some engineers even came from Japan onetime. They studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the mystery.Q. Are the local people scared?A. No, actually, they aren’t. They like the lights. And every year in early September there is a big town festival to celebrate the mystery lights.KeysOL1: A. 从左至右:4-5-1-2-3 B. Nick Brown, police officer, localpeopleOL 2:A. 1. A young girl standing in the middle of the road; 2. Because it wasraining heavily3. He stopped the car quickly;4. She said “I’m fine.” and walked quietly.5. He said the girl was Mary Anne and was killed in a car accident fiveyears ago.B. heavily; clearly; slowly; neatly; quickly; strangely; happily; quietly;Nervously; calmly;OL3A. 1. A terrible explosion; 2. In eastern Russian; 3. June 30, 1968.B. (first row) 4, 1, 3 (second row) 5, 2C. 1. a part of it broke off 2. lots of damage 3. its engine exploded4. used electricity5. set fire to the forestOL 4A. 2. a 3. h 4. d 5. g 6. e 7. b 8. cB. 1. different people see different lights 2. Robert Ellison saw thelights in 1883.3. The Native Americans thought the light were stars failing to the Earth4. A team from Japan studied the lights, but couldn’t solve the myster OL 5 1. solve; 2. it’s very likely; 3. stole; 4. apartment;5. showing;6. hasan al ibi; 7. it isn’t true; 8. walks in; 9. take out; 10. thief.Unit 6, Book 2Optional Listening 1Conversation 1Woman: Morning, Simon. Wow, you look tired.Man: Oh, I didn’t sleep very well last night. I had a weird dream. I was ina classroom at school,b u t I didn’t have any clothes on. No one looked atme, but I was really embarrassed.Conversation 2Woman: Jesse, Jesse, Wake up. You’re having a nightmare.。